228
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for WDM End-to- End Management Issue 02 Date 2010-09-24 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

iManager U2000 Unified Network ManagementSystemV100R002C01

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

Issue 02

Date 2010-09-24

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for
Page 3: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for
Page 5: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

About This Document

Related VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Version

iManager U2000 V100R002C01

Intended AudienceThis document describes how to configure an WDM network by using the end-to-end function.

This document guides you to manage an WDM network by using the trail management function.

This document is intended for:

l Network Monitoring Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer

l NM Administrator

l System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management About This Document

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Symbol Description

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

Command ConventionsThe command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

About This DocumentiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 7: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Based on Product Version V100R002C01The second release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01.

Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01The first release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management About This Document

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for
Page 9: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets.....................................................................................1-11.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................1-2

1.1.1 Protection Subnet...................................................................................................................................1-21.1.2 Isolated Node..........................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 Searching for Protection Subnets....................................................................................................................1-21.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength Protection.........................................................................................................1-3

1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection...............................................................................................1-41.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet.................................................................................1-51.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet Parameters.........................................................................1-61.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection Switching............................................................................1-7

1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRing.................................................................................................1-81.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection Group........................................................................................1-81.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet.............................................................................1-101.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection Subnet................................................................1-101.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection Switching.............................................................................1-11

1.5 Maintaining Protection Subnets....................................................................................................................1-121.5.1 Finding Protection Subnets..................................................................................................................1-131.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet Resources................................................................................................1-131.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet..................................1-141.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection Switching.....................................................................................1-15

1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes................................................................................................................................1-161.7 Deleting Protection Subnets..........................................................................................................................1-17

2 End-to-End WDM Management..............................................................................................2-12.1 Managing WDM Trails...................................................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 Configuration Task Flow.......................................................................................................................2-32.1.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................2-52.1.2.1 WDM Trail..........................................................................................................................................2-52.1.2.2 Conflict Trail.....................................................................................................................................2-102.1.2.3 Trail Creation Method.......................................................................................................................2-112.1.2.4 Process for Creating a Trail...............................................................................................................2-132.1.2.5 Platinum Service Group....................................................................................................................2-15

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management Contents

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail Search.................................................................................................2-172.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails................................................................................................................2-182.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete Services................................................................................................................2-192.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete Services.................................................................................2-202.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete Services..................................................................2-212.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services................................................................................................................2-222.1.4 Configuring WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-222.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.......................................................................................................................2-232.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail....................................................................................................................2-272.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails........................................................................................................................2-312.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal Trail............................................................................................................2-342.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN Trail....................................................................................................2-362.1.5 Creating a Platinum Service.................................................................................................................2-372.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service Group.......................................................................................................2-382.1.7 Service Authorization Management.....................................................................................................2-392.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a Service.................................................................................................2-402.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 User.........................................................................................2-412.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 User.................................................................................................2-422.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization Information......................................................................................2-422.1.8 Viewing WDM Trails...........................................................................................................................2-432.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM Trail......................................................................................2-442.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM Trail.......................................................................2-442.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow Diagram.................................................................2-462.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE Panel............................................................................................................2-472.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client Trails.........................................................................................................2-482.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server Trails........................................................................................................2-492.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the Trails.........................................................................................2-502.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection Trails.......................................................................2-512.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a Trail..........................................................................................2-522.1.9 Maintaining WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-522.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM Trails...............................................................................................2-532.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection Information..........................................................................................2-542.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM Trail.................................................................................................2-552.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM Trail.................................................................................2-552.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM Trail..................................................................2-562.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM Trail..................................................................2-572.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM Trail............................................2-582.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM Trail...............................................................................2-592.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh Trail.................................................................................2-592.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.................................................2-612.1.10 Modifying WDM Trails.....................................................................................................................2-622.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM Trail.................................................................2-62

ContentsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 11: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in Batches.................................................................................................2-642.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum Service.....................................................................................2-642.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service Group.........................................................................2-652.1.11 Deleting a WDM Trail.......................................................................................................................2-662.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditionalmethod...........................................................................................................................................................2-672.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh Trail................................................................................2-712.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLP Protection by Using the End-To-End TrailManagement Function (OptiX OSN 6800)...................................................................................................2-762.1.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...............................................................................................2-762.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-782.1.14.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-792.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function (OptiXOSN 6800).....................................................................................................................................................2-802.1.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...............................................................................................2-802.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-822.1.15.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-862.1.16 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditionalmethod...........................................................................................................................................................2-872.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 by Using a traditional method.......................................................................................................................................................................2-912.1.17.1 Networking Configuration..............................................................................................................2-912.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning.................................................................................2-932.1.17.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................2-962.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 with the Cross-Layer TrailCreation Method............................................................................................................................................2-992.1.18.1 Networking Configuration............................................................................................................2-1002.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-1012.1.18.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-1042.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function(52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))..................................................2-1062.1.19.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.............................................................................................2-1072.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-1082.1.19.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-1102.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Using the Cross-Layer Creation Function(52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))......................................................................2-1132.1.20.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.............................................................................................2-1132.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter Planning...............................................................................2-1152.1.20.3 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................2-117

2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection........................................................................................2-1192.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically.......................................................2-1202.2.1.1 Configuration Principle...................................................................................................................2-1202.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE............................................................................................2-1212.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE..........................................................................2-122

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management Contents

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM Trails..............................................................................................................2-1232.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Automatically..........................................................2-1252.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection..................................................2-1262.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually...............................................................2-1282.2.2.1 Configuration Principle...................................................................................................................2-1292.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE............................................................................................2-1292.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NE..........................................................................2-1302.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEs.........................................................................2-1312.2.2.5 Searching for WDM Trails..............................................................................................................2-1332.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually..................................................................2-1342.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath Protection..................................................2-136

2.3 Configuring EAPE......................................................................................................................................2-1372.3.1 EAPE..................................................................................................................................................2-1382.3.2 Creating an OCh Trail........................................................................................................................2-1412.3.3 Creating EAPE Objects......................................................................................................................2-1452.3.4 Querying EAPE Objects.....................................................................................................................2-1462.3.5 Starting EAPE Adjustment.................................................................................................................2-1472.3.6 Deleting EAPE Objects......................................................................................................................2-148

2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM Trails.............................................................................................................2-1482.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM Trail.........................................................................................2-1492.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM Trail.........................................................................................2-1502.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real Time..............................................................2-1512.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlation....................................................................................................2-151

2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM Trails................................................................................................2-1522.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM Trails.........................................................................2-1532.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM Trails.........................................................................2-1532.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM Trails...........................................................................................................2-1542.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDM Trails................................................2-1552.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM Trails................................................................................2-1562.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM Trail........................................................2-1562.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance Threshold......................................................................................2-157

2.6 Configuring Board Parameters....................................................................................................................2-1572.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board....................................................................................2-1582.6.1.1 About the Working Modes..............................................................................................................2-1582.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM board......................................................................................2-1602.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board...................................................................2-1612.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 board......................................................................2-1612.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs......................................................................2-1642.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode...........................................................................................................2-1642.6.3 Service Type.......................................................................................................................................2-1652.6.4 Configuring the Service Type............................................................................................................2-1712.6.5 Modifying Port...................................................................................................................................2-172

ContentsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 13: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................2-1732.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface).........................................................................................................2-1752.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2-1772.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration..............................................2-179

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management Contents

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for
Page 15: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figures

Figure 2-1 End-to-end WDM network management flow...................................................................................2-4Figure 2-2 Trail....................................................................................................................................................2-6Figure 2-3 OSC Trail............................................................................................................................................2-6Figure 2-4 ODUk (k = 1, 2, ...) trail.....................................................................................................................2-7Figure 2-5 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail.................................................................................................................2-8Figure 2-6 40G inverse multiplexing trail ...........................................................................................................2-9Figure 2-7 10G inverse multiplexing trail .........................................................................................................2-10Figure 2-8 A conflict trail generated because a fiber is added...........................................................................2-10Figure 2-9 A conflict trail generated because a single station cross-connection is lost.....................................2-11Figure 2-10 A conflict trail generated because a protection service is deleted on a per-NE basis....................2-11Figure 2-11 Creating trails by trail search..........................................................................................................2-14Figure 2-12 Creating trails in the automatic mode.............................................................................................2-15Figure 2-13 Platinum service group...................................................................................................................2-16Figure 2-14 Downgraded platinum service group..............................................................................................2-17Figure 2-15 Service authorization management.................................................................................................2-40Figure 2-16 Network Design..............................................................................................................................2-68Figure 2-17 Station A.........................................................................................................................................2-68Figure 2-18 Station B.........................................................................................................................................2-69Figure 2-19 Station C.........................................................................................................................................2-69Figure 2-20 Station D.........................................................................................................................................2-69Figure 2-21 Network design...............................................................................................................................2-72Figure 2-22 NE panel on station A.....................................................................................................................2-73Figure 2-23 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station C........................................................................2-73Figure 2-24 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station D........................................................................2-74Figure 2-25 Signal flow of the trail from station D to station B........................................................................2-74Figure 2-26 Configuration networking diagram of an OCh trail.......................................................................2-77Figure 2-27 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-77Figure 2-28 Signal flow of an OCh trail.............................................................................................................2-78Figure 2-29 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2......................................................................................2-78Figure 2-30 Configuration networking diagram of an ODUk trail....................................................................2-81Figure 2-31 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-82Figure 2-32 Signal flow of an ODUk trail.........................................................................................................2-83Figure 2-33 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4......................................................................................2-84

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management Figures

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-34 Intra-station signal flow of NE2 and NE3......................................................................................2-84Figure 2-35 Network Design..............................................................................................................................2-88Figure 2-36 Station A.........................................................................................................................................2-88Figure 2-37 Station B.........................................................................................................................................2-89Figure 2-38 Station C.........................................................................................................................................2-89Figure 2-39 Station D.........................................................................................................................................2-89Figure 2-40 Networking configuration for a GE service....................................................................................2-92Figure 2-41 Card configuration..........................................................................................................................2-92Figure 2-42 GE service signal flow ...................................................................................................................2-93Figure 2-43 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4......................................................................................2-94Figure 2-44 Networking configuration for a GE service..................................................................................2-100Figure 2-45 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-101Figure 2-46 GE service signal flow .................................................................................................................2-102Figure 2-47 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4....................................................................................2-102Figure 2-48 Configuration networking diagram of an ODU1 trail..................................................................2-107Figure 2-49 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-108Figure 2-50 ODU1 service signal flow............................................................................................................2-108Figure 2-51 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2....................................................................................2-109Figure 2-52 Configuration networking diagram of an Any service.................................................................2-114Figure 2-53 Card configuration........................................................................................................................2-115Figure 2-54 Any service signal flow................................................................................................................2-116Figure 2-55 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2....................................................................................2-116Figure 2-56 Scenario of the single VOA unit that takes the common OTU as the source...............................2-139Figure 2-57 Scenario of the dual VOA units that take the dual-fed and selective-receiving OTUs as the sources...........................................................................................................................................................................2-140Figure 2-58 Scenario of the dual VOA units with the OLP protection units...................................................2-140

FiguresiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 17: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Tables

Table 2-1 ODUk rate level...................................................................................................................................2-6Table 2-2 Comparison of methods for creating trails.........................................................................................2-12Table 2-3 Network data table.............................................................................................................................2-72Table 2-4 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-79Table 2-5 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-80Table 2-6 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-85Table 2-7 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...............................................................................................2-86Table 2-8 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..................................................................................................2-86Table 2-9 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...............................................................................................2-87Table 2-10 Parameter planning for an OCh trail................................................................................................2-95Table 2-11 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail.............................................................................................2-95Table 2-12 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail.............................................................................................2-95Table 2-13 Parameter planning for a GE service................................................................................................2-96Table 2-14 Parameter planning for an OCh trail................................................................................................2-98Table 2-15 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail.............................................................................................2-98Table 2-16 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail.............................................................................................2-99Table 2-17 Parameter planning for a GE service................................................................................................2-99Table 2-18 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-103Table 2-19 Parameter planning for a GE service..............................................................................................2-104Table 2-20 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-105Table 2-21 Parameter planning for a GE service..............................................................................................2-106Table 2-22 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-110Table 2-23 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections..........................................................................2-110Table 2-24 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...........................................................................................2-110Table 2-25 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-112Table 2-26 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections..........................................................................2-112Table 2-27 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail...........................................................................................2-112Table 2-28 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-117Table 2-29 Parameter planning for the Any service.........................................................................................2-117Table 2-30 Parameter planning for an OCh trail..............................................................................................2-119Table 2-31 Parameter planning for the Any service.........................................................................................2-119Table 2-32 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board..............................2-159Table 2-33 Service access function..................................................................................................................2-165

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management Tables

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

Page 18: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-34 Service access function..................................................................................................................2-166Table 2-35 Types of Service Access................................................................................................................2-167Table 2-36 Service types supported by the system...........................................................................................2-169Table 2-37 Parameters of the Client-Side Port.................................................................................................2-173Table 2-38 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration........................................................................................2-181Table 2-39 Create Cross-connect Service........................................................................................................2-183Table 2-40 Create SNCP Service.....................................................................................................................2-185Table 2-41 Create WXCP Service....................................................................................................................2-190

TablesiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 19: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

About This Chapter

A protection subnet has a structure of providing complete self-protection functions. The purposeof managing protection subnets is to configure and display network protection, for example,browsing, deleting, modifying and searching for protection subnets, managing isolated nodes.

1.1 Basic ConceptsAccording to the layered structure of transport network, protection subnet, belonging to thenetwork layer, refers to a network structure that has a comprehensive self-protection function.The protection subnet is a network unit of composing the optical transport network. To have agood understanding of the protection subnet, you need to learn some basic concepts of thenetwork layer.

1.2 Searching for Protection SubnetsBy searching for a protection subnet, the configured protection attributes at the NE layer on theU2000 are synchronized to the network layer on the U2000 to create protection subnetsautomatically.

1.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength ProtectionOn the U2000, you can create 1:N wavelength protection groups, search for 1:N wavelengthprotection subnets, and perform an external switch from 1:N wavelength protection subnets.

1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRingBy using the U2000, you can query the protection subnet resources for an ODUk SPRing, createan ODUk protection group, search for the ODUk SPRing, perform data consistency check onthe ODUk SPRing, set the protection subnet parameters for the ODUk SPRing, and delete anODUk SPRing.

1.5 Maintaining Protection SubnetsOn the U2000, you can maintain protection subnets.

1.6 Deleting Isolated NodesTo release protection resources that are used by isolated nodes, you need to delete isolated nodes.

1.7 Deleting Protection SubnetsWhen an existing protection subnet is not suitable, you can delete the protection subnet.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 20: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

1.1 Basic ConceptsAccording to the layered structure of transport network, protection subnet, belonging to thenetwork layer, refers to a network structure that has a comprehensive self-protection function.The protection subnet is a network unit of composing the optical transport network. To have agood understanding of the protection subnet, you need to learn some basic concepts of thenetwork layer.

1.1.1 Protection SubnetA protection subnet refers to a network architecture that has a comprehensive self-protectionfunction. It is a network that composes the optical transmission network.

1.1.2 Isolated NodeAn isolated node is not equal to an isolated NE. An isolated node refers to a special logicalsystem that is independent from any protection subnet. An isolated node does not belong to anyprotection subnet.

1.1.1 Protection SubnetA protection subnet refers to a network architecture that has a comprehensive self-protectionfunction. It is a network that composes the optical transmission network.

In the U2000, a protection subnet is a network level concept. NEs and fiber connections are thebasic elements required to construct a protection subnet. You should create NEs, perform basicconfigurations for them, and then properly create fiber connections between the NEs. You shouldhave access to sufficient resources to create a protection subnet.

1.1.2 Isolated NodeAn isolated node is not equal to an isolated NE. An isolated node refers to a special logicalsystem that is independent from any protection subnet. An isolated node does not belong to anyprotection subnet.

An isolated node is a node that is configured at NEs but cannot or does not compose a protectionsubnet with other nodes. Currently, the WDM equipment supports the 1:N optical path protectionsubnet and the ODUk SPRing protection subnet. The network node that is configured with the1:N optical path protection group or the ODUk SPRing protection group but does not belong toany protection subnet is an isolated node.

An isolated node should not exist in a transmission network that runs normally. The reason forthe existence of any isolated nodes can be as follows:

l The configuration is incorrect at the NE side.

l The fiber that should be connected to the node is not created on the U2000.

1.2 Searching for Protection SubnetsBy searching for a protection subnet, the configured protection attributes at the NE layer on theU2000 are synchronized to the network layer on the U2000 to create protection subnetsautomatically.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 21: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 In the Consistency Verification of Existing Subnet screen, select the protection subnet andclick Next.

NOTE

If the verification is unsuccessful and the subnet becomes abnormal, the search menu is unavailable. Inthis case, you need to delete the abnormal subnet from the network layer and then re-search for the subnet.

Step 3 Click Search to start the search. The Subnet Name, Consistent Status and Subnet Typeparameters of the searched protection subnet are automatically displayed.

Step 4 Click Next to check consistency of the protection subnet.

NOTE

If there are isolated nodes searched out, you can delete the nodes that do not form any protection subnet.Refer to 1.6 Deleting Isolated Nodes.

Step 5 Click Finish. The searched protection subnet is displayed in the Main Topology.

----End

1.3 Configuring 1:N Wavelength ProtectionOn the U2000, you can create 1:N wavelength protection groups, search for 1:N wavelengthprotection subnets, and perform an external switch from 1:N wavelength protection subnets.

1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection1:N (N≤8) optical channel protection is created based on 1:N (N≤8) optical channel protectiongroup. To create 1:N (N≤8) optical channel protection, you need to create a 1:N (N≤8) opticalchannel protection group for each node.

1.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection SubnetAfter creating 1:N wavelength protection groups and searching for WDM trails, you need tosearch for the 1:N wavelength protection subnet. In this way, you can manage the 1:N wavelengthprotection as a protection subnet.

1.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet ParametersYou can set parameters for a 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

1.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection SwitchingAfter you search out the 1:N wavelength protection subnet and set the related parameters, youcan verify whether the subnet works properly by performing the switching and querying theswitching status.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 22: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

1.3.1 Creating 1:N Optical Channel Protection1:N (N≤8) optical channel protection is created based on 1:N (N≤8) optical channel protectiongroup. To create 1:N (N≤8) optical channel protection, you need to create a 1:N (N≤8) opticalchannel protection group for each node.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.l Fibers must be correctly created, and all internal and external fibers must be correctly

connected.l An OCP card and two or more OTU cards of same kind must be created.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 320GV3, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA and

OptiX BWS 1600S.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600A and OptiX BWS 1600G (NA).

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > 1:N Optical ChannelProtection from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the protection from the NE.

Step 3 Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Double-click the Number of Working Channels field, and choose the proper number from thedrop-down list. For other parameters, refer to 1:N Optical Channel Protection.

Step 5 By referring to Step 4, set the corresponding OTU Optical Interface Number for ProtectionChannel and Working Channel, and set Protection Priorities for Working Channel.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 23: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l OTUs that serve as the working and protection channels must be configured on the same NE.

l Every card in this protection group and the OCP card must be set in the same shelf.

l If you need to check the consistency of the parameters, you need to set Parameter Consistency CheckFlag to a proper value.

Step 6 Click OK. The created 1:N (N≤8) optical channel protection group is displayed.

Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to configure a 1:N (N≤8) wavelength protection group of theopposite NE.

----End

1.3.2 Searching for 1:N Wavelength Protection SubnetAfter creating 1:N wavelength protection groups and searching for WDM trails, you need tosearch for the 1:N wavelength protection subnet. In this way, you can manage the 1:N wavelengthprotection as a protection subnet.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA, OptiX BWS 1600S and the

OptiX BWS 320GV3.l Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWS, LWC, LWC1, LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS boards.l Fibers must be created properly.l The 1:N wavelength protection group must be created.l The WDM trail must be created and the bidirectional client trail must be searched out.

Background InformationFor two NEs that are preconfigured as a 1:N WDM protection subnet, the protection group IDsof the WDM protection groups on the NEs must be consistent.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Click Next to perform the consistency check of the subnet.

Step 3 Click Search to search for the protection subnet.The existing 1:N wavelength protection subnet is displayed in the Protection View.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

Page 24: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to query the information of the isolated nodes that are searched out.

Step 5 Click Finish.

----End

1.3.3 Setting 1:N Wavelength Protection Subnet ParametersYou can set parameters for a 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The 1:N wavelength protection subnet must be searched out.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600S and the OptiX BWS 320GV3.

Context

CAUTIONChanging the protection mode may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform thisoperation.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Select a protection link, right-click, and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcutmenu. The Protection Subnet Attributes user interface is displayed. Click the ProtectionSubnet Parameters tab.

Step 3 Set parameters for the protection subnet.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 25: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

1.3.4 Verifying the 1:N Wavelength Protection SwitchingAfter you search out the 1:N wavelength protection subnet and set the related parameters, youcan verify whether the subnet works properly by performing the switching and querying theswitching status.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The 1:N wavelength protection group must be searched out.

Context

CAUTIONPerforming protection switching may interrupt services.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and clickthe Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query whether the nodes are switched and whether the protocols are enabled inthe 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

NOTE

If the protocol on a node is disabled, enable the protocol first.

Step 4 Perform the manual or forced switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by one in thecorresponding direction.

l To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switching fromthe drop-down menu. Then, select the channel that services are switched to according tothe OCP optical swtich number.

l To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switching from thedrop-down menu. Then, select the channel that services are switched to according to theOCP optical switch number.

NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at thesame time.

Step 5 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

Page 26: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 6 Click Query to query whether the services on all nodes are already switched to the protectionpaths in the 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

Step 7 Select all nodes in the protection subnet one by one. Click East or West, and then selectClear from the drop-down menu to clear the switching on each node.

Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

----End

1.4 Configuring Protection for an ODUk SPRingBy using the U2000, you can query the protection subnet resources for an ODUk SPRing, createan ODUk protection group, search for the ODUk SPRing, perform data consistency check onthe ODUk SPRing, set the protection subnet parameters for the ODUk SPRing, and delete anODUk SPRing.

1.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection GroupThe ODUk SPRing protection is used in a ring network that is configured with distributedservices. It occupies two ODUk channels, realizing the protection for multiple services amongall stations.

1.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection SubnetThe U2000 can search for and form ODUk SPRing protection subnets according to the createdfiber cables and ODUk SPRing protection groups. After you create an ODUk SPRing protectiongroup or search for WDM trails, you need to search for ODUk SPRing protection subnets. Inthis way, ODUk SPRing networks can be managed as protection subnets.

1.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection SubnetThis section describes how to set parameters of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet.

1.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection SwitchingThis topic describes how to perform the external switching for an ODUk SPRing protection onthe U2000. During the deployment commissioning, the external switching is performed to testwhether the ODUk SPRing protection functions normally and provides protection.

1.4.1 Creating an ODUk SPRing Protection GroupThe ODUk SPRing protection is used in a ring network that is configured with distributedservices. It occupies two ODUk channels, realizing the protection for multiple services amongall stations.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Currently, The ODU1/ODU2-level protection can be achieved.

When configuring the ODUk SPRing protection of ODU1 or ODU2 levels, the Service Modeof the port on the line board should be set to ODU1 or ODU2.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 27: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Background Informationl When the protection channel forms a ring, you can search out an ODUk protection subnet

at the network layer.l The ODUk SPRing protection of the ODU1 and ODU2 levels is supported currently.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Click New. The New ODUk Ring Network Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Protection Group ID and Level as required. In the Select Mapping Direction area, set theWest Working Unit, West Protection Unit, East Working Unit, and East Protection Unit.

To set a unit, select one channel from the Available Channel and click .

NOTE

l The services in the east and west directions must be configured on different NS2/ND2 boards.

l The working and protection channels in the east and west directions of an ODUk protection group can beon different NS2/ND2 boards.

l You can create a protection group when the Selected Channel contains at least East Protection Unit andWest Protection Unit.

Step 4 Click OK. After successful operation, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 5 Select one protection group. In Channel Mapping Relation, select West Working Unit andEast Working Unit. Right-click them, and select Bound Span ID.

NOTE

l Before binding the span IDs, ensure that a bidirectional cross-connection is created successfullybetween the working unit in the protection group in the corresponding direction and the add/drop board.

l The span IDs need be bound only on the stations that add or drop services. In the case of those stationsthat do not add or drop services, you need not perform such an operation.

Step 6 In the Bound Span ID window, set Span ID, and then click OK. Span ID will be updated.

Step 7 Select one protection group. Right-click the Management Node, and select YES. Then clickApply. Management Node will be updated.

Step 8 Select one protection group, and you can set parameters such as WTR Time(s) and EnableSD. In Channel Mapping Relation, double-click the Hold-Off Time(s) and set the hold-offtime.

NOTEThe hold-off time of the protection unit should be longer than that of the working unit.

Step 9 In the case of the NEs in other stations on the ring, start the NE Explorer. Then, refer to Steps1 through 8 to create the ODUk SPRing protection on the local NE, to complete the creation ofthe protection ring.

NOTEIn a ODUk SPRing protection group, there must be only one management node.

Step 10 After the protection ring is created, select one protection group, and click Start Protocol tomake the protection group take effect.

----End

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

Page 28: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

PostrequisiteSelect one protection group and click Delete. Click OK on the Confirm dialog box displayed.The protection group is deleted.

1.4.2 Searching for an ODUk SPRing Protection SubnetThe U2000 can search for and form ODUk SPRing protection subnets according to the createdfiber cables and ODUk SPRing protection groups. After you create an ODUk SPRing protectiongroup or search for WDM trails, you need to search for ODUk SPRing protection subnets. Inthis way, ODUk SPRing networks can be managed as protection subnets.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l Applies to the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I.

l Fiber connections must be created. All internal and external fibers are correctly connected.

l The bidirectional server trail must be searched out.

l An ODUk protection group must be created.

ContextNOTE

The search of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet supports only the scenario in which an ODU1 or ODU2 trailexists between the ports of adjacent protection groups.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Search for WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Click Next to check consistency of the protection subnet.

Step 3 Click Search to search for the protection subnet.The ODUk SPRing protection subnet that is searched out is displayed.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to query the information of the isolated nodes that are searched out.

Step 5 Click Finish.

----End

1.4.3 Setting Parameters of an ODUk SPRing Protection SubnetThis section describes how to set parameters of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l Applies to the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 I.

l The ODUk SPRing protection subnet must be searched out.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 29: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Context

CAUTIONChanging the protection mode may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform thisoperation.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Right-click a protection link and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut menu.The Protection Subnet Attributes user interface is displayed. Click the Protection SubnetParameters tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query the parameters of the protection subnet from the NE side.

Step 4 Set the WTR Time(s), SD Condition, and Management Node as required.

Step 5 Optional: Click Calculate Span ID. The calculated span ID is displayed in the Span ID field.

Step 6 Click Apply. After the operation succeeds, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 7 Click Close to return to the Protection View.

----End

1.4.4 Verifying the ODUk SPRing Protection SwitchingThis topic describes how to perform the external switching for an ODUk SPRing protection onthe U2000. During the deployment commissioning, the external switching is performed to testwhether the ODUk SPRing protection functions normally and provides protection.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The ODUk SPRing protection subnet must be searched out.

Context

CAUTIONThe protection switching may affect the services or the functions that are already configured.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

Page 30: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and clickthe Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query the statuses of protocol controller, east, and west of the protection subnetfrom the NE.

NOTE

If the protocol on a node is disabled, enable the protocol first.

Step 4 Perform the manual, forced or exercise switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one byone in the corresponding direction.l To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switch to

Protection-Ring from the drop-down menu.l To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switch to Protection-

Ring from the drop-down menu.l To perform a exercise switching, click East or West and select Exercise-Ring from the

drop-down menu.NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at thesame time.

Step 5 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

Step 6 Click Query to query whether the services on all nodes are already switched to the protectionpaths in the ODUk SPRing protection subnet.

Step 7 Select all nodes in the protection subnet one by one. Click East or West, and then select ClearAll from the drop-down menu to clear the switching on each node.

Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

----End

1.5 Maintaining Protection SubnetsOn the U2000, you can maintain protection subnets.

1.5.1 Finding Protection SubnetsWhen there are a number of protection subnets in a network, you use the search function toquickly find the desired protection subnet.

1.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet ResourcesAfter you search out a protection subnet, you can query the usage of subnet resources, so thatyou can plan and manage the subnet in a better way.

1.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N Wavelength Protection SubnetYou can run an external switching command to perform or clear the switching for a 1:Nwavelength protection subnet. External switching commands include: forced switching, manualswitching, and lockout. In the deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching totest whether the 1:N wavelength protection switching works properly. In the fault maintenance,you can perform this operation to locate faults.

1.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection Switching

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 31: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

On the U2000, you can perform or clear external switching for an ODUk ring network. Duringthe deployment and commissioning, you can perform external switching to test whether ODUkring switching works properly. During the fault maintenance, you can perform this operationfor fault location.

1.5.1 Finding Protection SubnetsWhen there are a number of protection subnets in a network, you use the search function toquickly find the desired protection subnet.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The protection subnet must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click in the Main Topology and choose Search WDM Protection Subnet. The SearchProtection Subnet dialog box is displayed.

NOTEYou need to select the Protection check box on the upper right corner of the Main Topology in advance.

Step 2 Set the search condition and enter the keyword.

Step 3 Click Search and the protection subnet that is searched out is highlighted in the Network View.

----End

1.5.2 Querying Protection Subnet ResourcesAfter you search out a protection subnet, you can query the usage of subnet resources, so thatyou can plan and manage the subnet in a better way.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The protection subnet must be searched out.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

Page 32: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Right-click a protection link, and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut menu.The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Click the Resource Description tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query the usage of the protection subnet resources.

----End

1.5.3 Performing the Protection Switching for a 1:N WavelengthProtection Subnet

You can run an external switching command to perform or clear the switching for a 1:Nwavelength protection subnet. External switching commands include: forced switching, manualswitching, and lockout. In the deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching totest whether the 1:N wavelength protection switching works properly. In the fault maintenance,you can perform this operation to locate faults.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The 1:N wavelength protection group must be searched out.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600S and OptiX BWS 320GV3.l Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWC1, LBE, LBES, LBF and LBFS boards.l Applies to the OptiX BWS 1600A and OptiX BWS 1600G (NA).l Applies to the LWF, LWFS, LWC1, LBE and LBES boards.

Context

CAUTIONForce switching and manual switching may interrupt services.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and clickthe Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query whether the nodes are switched and whether the protocols are enabled inthe 1:N wavelength protection subnet.

Step 4 To enable or disable the protocol, click Start Protocol and select Start or Stop from the drop-down menu.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 33: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

If you want to enable or disable the protocol for the entire protection subnet, select Start the ProtocolNetworkwide or Stop the Protocol Networkwide from the drop-down menu.

Step 5 Perform the manual or forced switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one by one in thecorresponding direction.

l To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switching fromthe drop-down menu.

l To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switching from thedrop-down menu.

NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select east and west directionat the same time.

Step 6 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

Step 7 Optional: Perform the lockout operation. Select a desired node, click Lock East or LockWest, and select Lockout of Protection.

Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

Step 9 Optional: To clear protection switching, select a node, click East or West, and then selectClear from the drop-down menu.

Step 10 Optional: Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click OK.

----End

1.5.4 Performing ODUk Ring Protection SwitchingOn the U2000, you can perform or clear external switching for an ODUk ring network. Duringthe deployment and commissioning, you can perform external switching to test whether ODUkring switching works properly. During the fault maintenance, you can perform this operationfor fault location.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The ODUk ring protection subnet must be searched out.

Context

CAUTIONThe protection switching may affect the services or the functions that are already configured.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-15

Page 34: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Maintain WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 The Protection Subnet Attributes window is displayed. Select the protection subnet and clickthe Protection Subnet Maintenance tab.

Step 3 Click Query to query the statuses of protocol controller, east, and west of the protection subnetfrom the NE.

Step 4 To enable or disable the protocol, click Start Protocol and select Start or Stop from the drop-down menu.

NOTE

If you want to enable or disable the protocol for the entire protection subnet, select Start the ProtocolNetworkwide or Stop the Protocol Networkwide from the drop-down menu.

Step 5 Perform the manual, forced or exercise switching on all nodes in the protection subnet one byone in the corresponding direction.l To perform a manual switching, click East or West and select Manual Switch to

Protection-Ring from the drop-down menu.l To perform a forced switching, click East or West and select Forced Switch to Protection-

Ring from the drop-down menu.l To perform a exercise switching, click East or West and select Exercise-Ring from the

drop-down menu.

NOTE

When performing the switching, maintenance or lockout on a node, you cannot select East and West at thesame time.

Step 6 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

Step 7 Optional: Perform the lockout operation. Select a desired node, click Lock East or LockWest, and select Lockout of Protection-Ring.

Step 8 Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful. Click OK.

Step 9 Optional: To clear protection switching, select a node, click East or West, and then select ClearAll from the drop-down menu.

Step 10 Optional: Click Yes in the Protection Attributes dialog box. A prompt is displayed, indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click OK.

----End

1.6 Deleting Isolated NodesTo release protection resources that are used by isolated nodes, you need to delete isolated nodes.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 35: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l One or more isolated nodes must exist.l Applies to the isolated node which node type is ODUk SPRing.

Context

CAUTIONDeleting isolated nodes may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform thisoperation.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Isolated Node from the MainMenu.

Step 2 Select the isolated node you want to delete, right-click and choose Delete.

Step 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

----End

1.7 Deleting Protection SubnetsWhen an existing protection subnet is not suitable, you can delete the protection subnet.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

ContextNOTE

The deletion of a protection subnet will leave the equipment or services unprotected. Hence, exercisecaution before this operation.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Protection Subnet > Manage WDM Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Right-click the protection subnet to be deleted and choose Delete from the NM or Delete fromthe NE or Delete All from the NM from the shortcut menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 1 Managing WDM Protection Subnets

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-17

Page 36: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTEThe methods to delete a protection subnet are as follows:

l Delete from the NM: Deletes the relation between the protection subnet and logical systems at the NEside, to allow deleting of fibers, re-uploading, and so on. This command is not delivered to the NE anddoes not affect the services. The deleted protection subnet can be located by using the search feature.The U2000 locates it according to the NE layer protection information.

l Delete from the NE: Deletes the protection subnet, logical systems at the NE side, and all traffic inthe protection subnet. The deleted protection subnet cannot be restored without being created again.

l Delete All from the NM: Deletes data other than fibers in the network layer. After the deletion, youcan search out trails and protection subnets again by using the search feature. It is recommended thatyou do not select this option, because a large amount of data will be deleted.

Step 3 In the Operation Prompt dialog box, click Yes.

NOTE

If Delete from the NE is selected, you need to confirm the operation once more.

Step 4 After completion, click Close in the dialog box displayed to complete the operation.

----End

1 Managing WDM Protection SubnetsiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

1-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 37: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2 End-to-End WDM Management

About This Chapter

You can configure WDM services using the trail management function.

PrerequisiteThe trail management license must be provided for the U2000.

2.1 Managing WDM TrailsThis section describes how to manage end-to-end WDM services based on the trail managementfunction of the U2000.

2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionThe optical layer multipath protection can fully utilize the existing idle line resources of thenetwork. Through the optical cross-connections of the WSS boards, this protection offersautomatic and flexible selection of the protection paths in the protection switching.

2.3 Configuring EAPEThe U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.By adjusting the optical power of a WDM trail, the EAPE can reduce or even eliminate bit errorsof services on the trail.

2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM TrailsYou can use the U2000 function of end-to-end trail management to manage the alarms generatedon WDM trails at the network layer.

2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM TrailsYou can use the network layer function of the U2000 to perform end-to-end performancemanagement on WDM trails.

2.6 Configuring Board ParametersWhen configuring WDM services, you need to configure different boards in the network. Thevarious types of boards and the procedure for configuring the board parameters are describedhere.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 38: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1 Managing WDM TrailsThis section describes how to manage end-to-end WDM services based on the trail managementfunction of the U2000.

PrerequisiteA U2000 user can manage all the trails that the user creates. To manage a trail that is created byanother U2000 user, a U2000 user must meet any of the following conditions:l The U2000 user belongs to the Administrators user group.l The right to manage the required trail is allocated to the U2000 user.

2.1.1 Configuration Task FlowA configuration task flow describes the operation tasks that manage an WDM network by usingthe end-to-end function of the U2000. In addition, the relationships between the operation tasksare described.

2.1.2 Basic ConceptsThis section describes the basic concepts of the WDM end-to-end management.

2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail SearchAfter a new network is set up or services are configured on a per-NE basis, you need to performan WDM trail search so that you can manage configured services by using the trail managementfunction.

2.1.4 Configuring WDM TrailsAfter searching out the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk orclient trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails.

2.1.5 Creating a Platinum ServiceIn a platinum service group, the WDM trails do not pass through the same NE, fiber or fiber/cable pipe, so that the risk that multiple trails are interrupted is lowered.

2.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service GroupYou can bind a trail or trails when you need to add an existing trail to a platinum service groupor bind existing trails as a platinum service group.

2.1.7 Service Authorization ManagementIf there are multiple service trails maintained by different operators, they may care about onlythe trails in their own responsibility but ignore the other services. Service authorization can filterthe information not in concern of an operator, who then views and manages only the trails in theresponsibility. In this manner, the management and maintenance efficiency is improved.

2.1.8 Viewing WDM TrailsThis section describes how to view the connection relation of all boards on a WDM NE.

2.1.9 Maintaining WDM TrailsThe end-to-end trails are carriers of services of the customers. In the routine maintenance, theadministrator and maintainer must find out the status of the trails to ensure that all the servicesare transmitted correctly.

2.1.10 Modifying WDM TrailsDue to service requirements, sometimes, you need to modify the configuration of a WDM trail.U2000 supports manually modifying the source and sink of an exisiting WDM trail and the trailnames in batches, instead of creating WDM trails. This greatly simplifies the operations.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 39: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.11 Deleting a WDM TrailThe operation deletes the WDM trails from the network layer or from the NE layer. You needto delete the trails if the network will be adjusted or rebuilt.

2.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX BWS 1600G by Usinga traditional methodThis sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-to-end mode.

2.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh TrailThis section describes how to configure an OCh trail in the end-to-end mode.

2.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLP Protection by Using the End-To-End Trail Management Function (OptiX OSN 6800)This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on theOptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Using the Cross-Layer CreationFunction (OptiX OSN 6800)This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 by Using atraditional methodThis configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service with the SNCP protection.

2.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on the OptiX OSN 6800 with theCross-Layer Trail Creation MethodThis configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service with the SNCP protection.

2.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Using the Cross-Layer CreationFunction (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Using the Cross-Layer CreationFunction (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

2.1.1 Configuration Task FlowA configuration task flow describes the operation tasks that manage an WDM network by usingthe end-to-end function of the U2000. In addition, the relationships between the operation tasksare described.

Referring to the Figure 2-1, configure and manage an WDM network.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 40: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-1 End-to-end WDM network management flow

NOTE

l When you create a Client or an ODUk trail whose source or sink is an NG WDM NE, you need to setthe working mode of the card, and service mode and service type of the port. For details, see 2.6Configuring Board Parameters.

l When you create a Client or an ODUk trail in a network that consists of NG WDM NEs, you can createthe trail on an OCh server trail directly. Specifically, cross-layer creation is supported and the U2000can create mid-layer server trails automatically.

In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow diagram, the main phases of managing anWDM network by using the end-to-end function of the U2000 are shown, that is, configuringand maintaining a trail. All these functions require the corresponding license that provides theend-to-end management function.

The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in eachphase.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 41: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.2 Basic ConceptsThis section describes the basic concepts of the WDM end-to-end management.

2.1.2.1 WDM TrailThe concept, type and relevant information about trails are described here.

2.1.2.2 Conflict TrailIf a trail exists on the U2000, but the cross-connection that forms the trail does not exist at theNE layer, this trail is a conflict trail.

2.1.2.3 Trail Creation MethodThe U2000 provides multiple methods for creating trails to meet different operation habits ofusers and requirements of different service scenarios.

2.1.2.4 Process for Creating a TrailThe trail creation process describes a series of procedures before a trail is generated on theU2000. The detailed process varies with the creation method.

2.1.2.5 Platinum Service GroupThe platinum service group is the combination of multiple WDM trails. Any two trails in thegroup do not pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, services are nothardly interrupted.

2.1.2.1 WDM TrailThe concept, type and relevant information about trails are described here.

The U2000 enables you to create, search, view, join, split, and delete WDM trails. In addition,the U2000 provides the signal flow diagram that visually displays the signal flow and thetransmission media layer route of trails. This facilitates operations and improves the maintenanceefficiency.

Currently the U2000 provides the following OTN trail modules that comply with ITU-T G.872:l Client traill ODUk trail: optical channel data unit (ODUk) traill OTUk trail: optical channel transport (OTUk) unit traill OCh trail: optical channel traill OMS trail: optical multiplexing section traill OTS trail: optical transmission section traill OSC trail: optical supervisory channel (OSC) trail

NOTE

l The first six types are related to services, and the OSC trail is related to supervisory signals.

l The OTS trail cannot be deleted from the U2000. You must delete the fiber connection before deletingthe OTS trail.

l The rate level varies with the value of "k" in ODUk/OTUk. For details, see Table 2-1. ODU5G/OTU5Gis a level customized by Huawei.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 42: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-1 ODUk rate level

Trail Level Rate (bit/s)

ODU0 1.25G

ODU1/OTU1 2.5G

ODU5G/OTU5G 5G

ODU2/OTU2 10G

ODU3/OTU3 40G

Trail ModuleFigure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 illustrate the relationship and location of the trails.

Figure 2-2 Trail

Client

OCh

OMS

OTSOTS OTS

ODUk

OTUk

NOTE

l In the case of the traditional WDM equipment, such as the OptiX BWS 1600G, an OMS trail terminatesat the FIU cards.

l In the case of the NG WDM equipment, such as the OptiX OSN 6800, an OMS trail terminates at theMUX and DMUX cards.

Figure 2-3 OSC Trail

OSCTM RM TM RM

OSC OSC

OLA OTMOTM

OSC Trail OSC Trail

FIU FIU FIU FIU

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 43: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ODUk TrailDifferent from other trails, an ODUk/OTUk sets the source and sink at the internal ports of anOTU card, a tributary card or a line card. Figure 2-4 displays a typical ODUk trail module whosesource and sink are set on the internal ports of tributary ports or of line cards.

Figure 2-4 ODUk (k = 1, 2, ...) trail

RX1 TX1LP1 ODU1

OUT IN

LP1ODU1

ODU1

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

ODU2

ODU1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail

ODU2 Trail

ODU1 Trail

Client Trail

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

NS2 NS2TQS TQSSTM-16 STM-16

In the case of the client-side service whose rate is less than 1.25 Gbit/s, an ODU0 trail is added,as shown in Figure 2-5.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

Page 44: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-5 ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, ...) trail

RX1 TX1

LP1 ODU1

OUT IN

LP1ODU1

ODU1

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

ODU2

ODU1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail

ODU2 Trail

ODU1 Trail

Client Trail

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

52NS252TOM 52TOM52NS2

GE GEODU0 ODU0

ODU0 Trail

Inverse Multiplexing TrailThe rate of the client layer of an inverse multiplexing trail is greater than the rate of the serverlayer. Hence, an inverse multiplexing client trail needs multiple trails to serve as its server layer.Currently, you can only search for an inverse multiplexing trail, but you cannot create an end-to-end inverse multiplexing trail.

An inverse multiplexing client trail can take an ODU1 or ODU2 trail as the server trail. That is,an inverse multiplexing client trail cannot take ODU1 and ODU2 trails as the server trails at thesame time.

40G inverse multiplexing trail modelThe transmission rate of a single wavelength is 40G, but a single wavelength cannot used forlong-distance transmission due to an optical layer index (such as dispersion) restriction. In a40G inverse multiplexing transmission scheme, a 40G signal is converted to four 10G ODU2signals, each of which uses one wavelength. This is equal to four 10G signals on the line sideand lowers the optical layer index requirement.

Figure 2-6 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the TSXL card. You cannotdynamically adjust the bandwidth of STM-256 or OC768 services whose rate is 40G. Hence,you can search for a client trail only after you configure four ODU2 trails. If you configure onlyone, two or three ODU2 trails, services are unavailable and you fail to search for the client trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 45: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-6 40G inverse multiplexing trail

10G inverse multiplexing trail modelThe TDX card is a 10G inverse multiplexing tributary card that has two individual transmissionpaths. Each path inversely multiplexes a 10G service to multiple ODU1 signals, which are cross-connected to a line card for transmission. The 10G service uses any or all of the four ODU1signals according to bandwidth status. When the 10G service does not use all of the four ODU1signals, the 10G service share an ODU2 trail with other ODU1 signals. This saves line resources.

Figure 2-7 shows the inverse multiplexing trail model of the IP3 port on the TDX card. A 10Gservice is an Ethernet service for which you can dynamically adjust bandwidth. The server layerallows one, two, three or four ODU1 trails. Hence, the client trail that you search out is ofdifferent rate levels.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

Page 46: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-7 10G inverse multiplexing trail

2.1.2.2 Conflict Trail

If a trail exists on the U2000, but the cross-connection that forms the trail does not exist at theNE layer, this trail is a conflict trail.

Cause

A trail consists of a single station cross-connection at the NE layer. If the configuration data atthe NE layer changes and a complete trail cannot be formed at the network layer, the trail thatexists on the U2000 is a conflict trail, and the corresponding cross-connection at the NE layerbecomes a discrete service.

l Adding a fiber leads to trail extension.

Assume that a trail is NE A-> NE B. Create a fiber from NE B to NE C, and create a serviceon NE C. As a result, the trail is extended as NE A->NE C. The trail NE A-> NE B thatexists on the U2000 becomes a conflict trail. See Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 A conflict trail generated because a fiber is added

NE A NE B NE C

l The single station cross-connection is lost.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 47: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

The original trail is NE A-> NE C. The cross-connection of the trail on NE B is deleted.On the U2000, the original trail of NE A-> NE C becomes a conflict trail and services onNE A and NE C become discrete services. See Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 A conflict trail generated because a single station cross-connection is lost

NE A NE B NE C

l Delete a protection service on a per-NE basis.

NE 1 and NE 2 comprises a 1+1 linear protection and the original trail is NE 1-> NE 2. Ifcross-connection D of NE 2 is deleted, the original trail of NE 1-> NE 2 becomes a conflicttrail. See Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 A conflict trail generated because a protection service is deleted on a per-NEbasis

Working Trail

Protection Trail

NE1 NE2

Cross-ConnectionA

Cross-ConnectionB

Cross-ConnectionC

Cross-ConnectionD

Handling MethodDuring trail search, if the U2000 searches out a conflict trail, the U2000 stops the searching andasks you to confirm the conflict trail. There are the following two handling methods:l Stop searching.

If you fail to verify that the conflict trail is correct, you can choose to stop searching. Theconflict trail remains, but the U2000 does not generate a new trail.

l Continue to search.The system deletes the conflict trail from the network layer. This operation does not deletethe cross-connection on a per-NE basis, and does not affect services on the NE.

NOTE

After the conflict trail is deleted, its customized information, including the trail name, remarks, ispermanently lost and cannot be restored.

2.1.2.3 Trail Creation MethodThe U2000 provides multiple methods for creating trails to meet different operation habits ofusers and requirements of different service scenarios.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-11

Page 48: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

To successfully create a trail on the U2000, the following prerequisites must be met:l All the NEs that the trail passes through must have enough idle resources.l The data on the U2000 must be consistent with the data on the NE.l The fibers on the U2000 are correctly connected.

Table 2-2 shows the methods, features, and application scenarios of the trail creation.

Table 2-2 Comparison of methods for creating trails

Trail Creation Method Feature Application Scenario

Creating trails by trail search On a per-NE basis, configureall nodes that a service passesthrough. Then, by using thenetwork-layer trail searchfunction, combine cross-connections of each node toform end-to-end trails.

This method is applicable tothe scenario that the service isalready configured on a per-NE basis.This method requires bettertechnical knowledge ofusers. During the search,users may need to handleconflict trails and discreteservices.

Creating trails in theautomatic mode

l The service is configureddirectly at the networklayer. After the activationof the trail, the U2000deliver the cross-connections related to thetrail to all NEs involved.

l The route can becomputed automatically.

l If multiple routes existbetween the selectedsource and sink, you canset the compulsory link,the prohibited node toselect a route.

This method is applicable tothe creation of multi-layerOTN trails and a majority ofnormal trails.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 49: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Trail Creation Method Feature Application Scenario

Creating trails by trailreplication

l The service is configureddirectly at the networklayer. After the activationof the trail, the U2000deliver the cross-connections related to thetrail to all NEs involved.

l The route can becomputed automatically.

l You can only use theexsiting trail on theU2000 as a template andcreate the trails with thesame route in batches.

This method is applicable tothe batch creation of trailswith the same route, that is,the trails share the samesource, sink, and server trailwith the original trail.

2.1.2.4 Process for Creating a TrailThe trail creation process describes a series of procedures before a trail is generated on theU2000. The detailed process varies with the creation method.

Figure 2-11 shows the process for creating trails by trail search. Figure 2-12 shows the processfor creating trails in the automatic mode.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

Page 50: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-11 Creating trails by trail search

End

Y

N

Obtain all cross-connectionsof NEs networkwide

Y

Stop the trail search

N

Check whetherdiscrete services that do

not form trails exist

Y

N

Start

Sort cross-connections by level

Search out trails at the serverlayer and then the client layer

Check whethernew trails conflict with

original trails

The network managementsystem starts to manage

new trails

The information about discreteservices is displayed

The searched is paused andconflicting trails are displayed

Whether to resumethe searchDelete conflicting trails

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 51: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-12 Creating trails in the automatic mode

End

Y

N

Check whether theserver trail for the trail to

be created exists

N

Y

Set trail attributes, such as thedirection, level, and rate

Set the source and sink NEsfor the trail

Set route restriction conditionsrelated to the node, link, and

timeslot (optional)

Whether to set thetrail as an SNCP trail

Set basic attributes for the trail

Activate the trail

Start

Set the SNCP protection route

Create or search out theserver trail

2.1.2.5 Platinum Service GroupThe platinum service group is the combination of multiple WDM trails. Any two trails in thegroup do not pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, services are nothardly interrupted.

As shown in Figure 2-13, a bidirectional service exists between Router1 and Router2 and thisservice is displayed as trail A between NE1 and NE2 in the management scope of the U2000.To protect the service, another bidirectional trail needs to be added between the two routers andthis trail is displayed as trail B between NE3 and NE4 in the management scope of the U2000.When you create trail B, trail A is considered as a reference trail so that the two trails do not

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

Page 52: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

pass through the same NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe. In this way, the risk that the two trails areinterrupted at the same time is lowered. Therefore, trail A and trail B form a platinum servicegroup.

Figure 2-13 Platinum service group

The platinum service group must meet the requirements as follows:

l A platinum service group contains a minimum of two trails.

l The trails cannot pass through the same NEs.

l The trails cannot pass through the same fiber.

l The trails cannot pass through the same fiber/cable pipes.

NOTEThe preceding constraints do not apply to a trail under protection. For example, the protection trails fortwo SNCP services travel along the same fiber/cable pipe. The platinum service group that the twoprotection trails belong to is Normal. In this case, a downgrade alarm does not occur.

When a third trail needs to be added into the platinum service group, you only need to specifythe existing trail A or trail B as the reference trail and then the U2000 automatically searchesout the two existing trails and groups the three trails.

NOTE

You can also bind the existing trails to generate a platinum service group.

As shown in Figure 2-13, when the platinum service group is no longer required, you can removetrail B from the platinum service group instead of deleting trail B. In this way, trail A and trailB are independent of each other and their routes are not mutually constrained. If rerouting occursor the route is modified, the two trails may pass through the same NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe.

When you create trails, different trails cannot fully comply with the requirements of the platinumservices due to insufficient resources and then you can create downgraded platinum services.As shown in Figure 2-14, trail A and trail B pass through NE5 and thus you can create only adowngraded platinum service group. A downgraded platinum service group cannot provide theexpected protection of a platinum service group. For example, when NE5 is faulty, theconnection between Router1 and Router2 is interrupted. To make the service group fully complywith the requirements of the platinum service, you can change the route of trail B to the routeof trail C between NE3 and NE4, when resources are sufficient.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 53: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-14 Downgraded platinum service group

A platinum service group contains multiple trails. Therefore, the service is not interrupted unlessall trails are interrupted. After detecting the interruption of a certain trail, the U2000 checkswhether other trails in the platinum service group are interrupted. If a complete trail exists, theseverity of the service interruption alarm is reduced to a lower level.

When the platinum service group does not meet the requirements due to a certain cause, theplatinum service group is in the downgraded state and the U2000 reports an alarm about thedowngrade of the platinum service.

2.1.3 Creating WDM Trails by Trail SearchAfter a new network is set up or services are configured on a per-NE basis, you need to performan WDM trail search so that you can manage configured services by using the trail managementfunction.

2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM TrailsAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you needto search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generateend-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

2.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete ServicesIf some cross-connections on an NE cannot form trails at the network layer and are isolated onthe NE, these cross-connections are called discrete services. By using the U2000, you can viewthe details of a discrete service and the signal flow diagram of the trail where the discrete serviceis transmitted, and analyze the cause of the discrete service. This improves the maintainabilityof the discrete services of the U2000.

2.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete ServicesIf certain cross-connections on NEs cannot form network-layer trails but exist on NEs separately,these cross-connections are called discrete services. Deactivating discrete services deletes theNE cross-connections from NEs and saves the relevant data on the U2000 only. This operationhelps to release the occupied channels. On the contrary, activating discrete services deployscross-connections to NEs according to the data saved on the U2000.

2.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete ServicesIn this user interface, you can acknowledge discrete services and filter discrete services basedon their acknowledgment status.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

Page 54: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete ServicesDiscrete services occupy the cross-connections required by normal services. As a result, normalservices cannot be created. Therefore, you need to delete the discrete services that are not in use.

2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM TrailsAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you needto search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to generateend-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.l Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment.

Contextl Among the five types of trails, only the OTS trail can be managed directly without being

searched, because the data is stored at the network layer when fibers are created.l The networking in which no fiber connection exists between cross-connections of the same

level is not supported.l The U2000 supports the ability to search for an unterminated trail.l The U2000 supports the ability to search for a WDM trail that has multiple sources and

sinks.l The U2000 supports the ability to restore the user-defined information. When you delete a

trail from the network layer of the U2000, the user-defined information of the trail is savedin the system. Hence, when you search for a trail that has the same source or sink anddirection as the deleted trail, you can restore the user-defined information.

l You can only search for an inverse multiplexing client trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 55: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from thenetworking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the areathat beyond the selected subnet range.

l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out becausethey are not filtered out during verification.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to endtrails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.

l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may causeinterruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.

----End

2.1.3.2 Viewing Discrete ServicesIf some cross-connections on an NE cannot form trails at the network layer and are isolated onthe NE, these cross-connections are called discrete services. By using the U2000, you can view

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

Page 56: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

the details of a discrete service and the signal flow diagram of the trail where the discrete serviceis transmitted, and analyze the cause of the discrete service. This improves the maintainabilityof the discrete services of the U2000.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

ContextTo ensure the correctness of the discrete service data, you can perform a trail search beforeviewing discrete services. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Conditions dialog box, set the filter criteria, andclick Filter. In the WDM Discrete Service Management list, the details of discrete servicesare displayed.

Step 4 In the list, select a discrete service.

Step 5 Optional: At the bottom of the window, click the Transmission Media Layer Route tab. Onthis tab page, you can view the NE that carries the cross-connection.

Step 6 Optional: At the bottom of the window, click the Signal Flow Diagram tab. On this tab page,you can view the signal flow of the trail where the discrete service is transmitted and analyzethe cause of the discrete service.

NOTEDue to the loss of cross-connections or fibers, only part of the trail where the discrete service is transmittedis displayed in the Signal Flow Diagram. That is, this part of the trail contains the discrete service and isterminated at a missing cross-connection or fiber.

----End

2.1.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Discrete ServicesIf certain cross-connections on NEs cannot form network-layer trails but exist on NEs separately,these cross-connections are called discrete services. Deactivating discrete services deletes theNE cross-connections from NEs and saves the relevant data on the U2000 only. This operationhelps to release the occupied channels. On the contrary, activating discrete services deployscross-connections to NEs according to the data saved on the U2000.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 57: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria, and clickFilter.

Step 4 Optional: Select one or more inactive discrete services, right-click, and then choose Activefrom the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Optional: Select one or more active discrete services, right-click, and then choose Deactivatefrom the shortcut menu.

NOTE

When activating or deactivating discrete services in batches each time, you can select a maximum numberof 1,000 records. Otherwise, the Active or Deactivate menu grays out.

Step 6 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

2.1.3.4 Acknowledging or Unacknowledging Discrete Services

In this user interface, you can acknowledge discrete services and filter discrete services basedon their acknowledgment status.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

ContextDiscrete services occupy network resources and this may affect the successful creation of trails.Therefore, you can acknowledge unnecessary cross-connections. In this way, another networkmaintainer can determine whether a discrete service is an unnecessary cross-connection basedon the acknowledgment status. If unnecessary, the maintainer deletes the service.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter criteria and clickFilter.

Step 4 Optional: In the list, select one or more discrete services that are not acknowledged, right-click,and choose Acknowledge from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Optional: In the list, select one or more discrete services that are acknowledged, right-click,and choose Cancel Acknowledgement from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

NOTE

Right-click one or more discrete services and choose Remarks from the shortcut menu. In the Remarksdialog box, enter detailed descriptions of the discrete services.

----End

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

Page 58: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Resultl If a discrete service is acknowledged, Acknowledge Status of the service is Yes.l If a discrete service is not acknowledged yet, Acknowledge Status of the service is No.

Postrequisitel When viewing discrete services, you can filter the services based on their acknowledgment

status.l To release resources, you can delete the discrete services that are acknowledged. For

detailed operations, see 2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete Services.

2.1.3.5 Deleting Discrete ServicesDiscrete services occupy the cross-connections required by normal services. As a result, normalservices cannot be created. Therefore, you need to delete the discrete services that are not in use.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The discrete services to be deleted must be in the inactive state.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Discrete Service from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 3 In the Set Discrete Service Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria, and clickFilter.

Step 4 Select one or more discrete services to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

When deleting discrete services in batches each time, you cannot select inactive and active discrete servicesand can select a maximum number of 1,000 records. Otherwise, the Delete menu grays out.

Step 5 In the prompt dialog box, click OK.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

2.1.4 Configuring WDM TrailsAfter searching out the relevant trail information on the U2000, you can create OCh, ODUk orclient trails by specifying the sources and sinks of the trails.

2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh TrailThe U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner inapplication scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you should

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 59: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

create OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of theequipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manuallyby using the trail management function of the U2000.

2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk TrailThe U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand the sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates theODUk trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure andensures proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible mannerin application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.

2.1.4.3 Creating Client TrailsThe U2000 supports creating client trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 generates a client trail based on the searched or created servertrail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner inapplication scenarios such as deployment or expansion.

2.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal TrailThe trails created on the same NE are called mono nodal trails. A mono nodal trail is createdbased on inter-card cross-connections. If the inter-card cross-connection is not supported, a mononodal trail is created based on fibers.

2.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN TrailWhen you create a Client trail or an ODUk trail for the NG WDM, an intermediate server trailis automatically created at the OCh server layer without creating the trail at each layer. Thissimplifies the operations.

2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh TrailThe U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner inapplication scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you shouldcreate OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of theequipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manuallyby using the trail management function of the U2000.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The OMS server trail must be searched out.

ContextThe U2000 supports the function of creating a third-party wavelength service. A third-partywavelength service is the OCh trail whose source or sink port is located on the multiplexing anddemultiplexing card or the add/drop multiplexing card, or whose source and sink ports are locatedon such cards.

The U2000 does not support the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.

The source and sink of an OCh trail are the ports at the line side of the OTU boards. The boardsthat the trail passes should support dynamic optical cross-connection or should contain static

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

Page 60: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

optical cross-connection. The boards that support the dynamic optical cross-connection areclassified by equipment domain as follows:l For the OptiX BWS 1600G and the OptiX BWS 1600A: WSM9, WSD9, WSM5, WSD5

and RMU9.l For the OptiX Metro 6100V1E: WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, and WSMD4.l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 I/8800 II and OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A/8800 I(NA)/

8800 II(NA): WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, ROAM, WSMD4, 11RDU9, 11WSMD2, 12WSM9,12WSD9, 13WSM9, 13WSD9, RDU6, WSM6.

Typical OCh networking scenarios are as follows:l The typical scenario of non-protected OCh networking is as follows:

OTU WSD WSMFIU

OSC

FIU FIU FIU

OSCOSC

ONE2

ONE3ONE1

D40 M40

OCh

OCh OCh

oxcfiber

OTU

OTU

OTU

l The typical scenario of protected OCh networking is as follows:

OTU

WSD WSM

OSC OSC

ONE2 ONE4ONE1

OChoxcfiber

OLP

FIU

OSC

WSD WSM

OSC

OSC

OSC

ONE3

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OLP

OTU

Networking scenarios of creating a third-party wavelength service or an unterminated OCh trailare as follows:l The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source or sink is the

third-party equipment.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 61: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source and sink arethe third-party equipment.

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network inan intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and displayedin the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OTS level or higher levelsbetween NEs.

l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when youspecify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails, an errormessage is displayed indicating the failure causes.

l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create atrail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.Set the level to OCh and set the direction according to the specific networking.

Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,select the NE, card, and port.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

Page 62: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

TIP

l During the selection of source or sink in the NE Panel, when you move the cursor to a board, thewavelength information of the board port is displayed.

l By default, if you already select one end (source or sink) of a trail and open the NE Panel to selectanother end, the U2000 uses the board and port that have the same band and wavelength with priority.

l After you select the Enable third-party wavelength service port check box in the lower portion ofthe window, you can create a trail whose source or sink is located on the multiplexing anddemultiplexing card (for example, M40 and D40) or the add/drop multiplexing card (for example, MR2and WSM9), or whose source and sink ports are located on such cards. This trail is a third-partywavelength service.

NOTE

l By default, the selected wavelength frequency is the current wavelength frequency of a (source) sink port.You can select another proper wavelength frequency to meet the actual requirements.

l After the wavelength frequency for a source (sink) port is selected, the same wavelength frequency is selectedfirst for the corresponding sink (source) port. If the same wavelength frequency is not available for thecorresponding sink (source) port, the current wavelength frequency of the selected sink (source) port isselected by default.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.1. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut

menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails andset them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmostserver trail.

2. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4. Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channeldialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail for the working route.

5. Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links ofthe OTS level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. Afterroutes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click thetrail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In thedialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trailagain to cancel the selection.

l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NEof the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of thetrail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is markedwith sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail ChannelSelection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailfor the working route.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 63: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created are displayedin the lower portion of the topology view.

Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail Managementwindow. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to be created. The fiber doesnot support this function.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,including the name and ID.

Step 6 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the followingoperations as required.

l Click OPA Mode. In the OPA Mode dialog box, set the optical power adjustment modeto Auto or Manual for the OCh trail to be created. For details, see 2.1.9.10 Modifying theOptical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.

l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after itis created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on theU2000.

l If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trailsuccessfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn therelevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Powerfor the Trails.

Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

Result

After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

PostrequisiteIf a fiber is connected to the source or sink of the new third-party wavelength service, the servicewill be extended after a trail search.

2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail

The U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand the sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates theODUk trail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure andensures proper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible mannerin application scenarios such as deployment or expansion.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The OTU1 ODU1, ODU2, ODU3 or OTU2 server trail must be searched out.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

Page 64: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l If the source or sink is the TOM or 12LQMS card, you must set the working mode of thecard first. For details, see 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.

ContextThe configuration principles are as follows:l The source and sink of an ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5G) trail are LP ports of the TDG, TQM,

or TQS cards. The source and sink of an ODU0 trail are the LP ports of the tributary cards,such as the 52TOM cards.

l The line cards that support the grooming of ODU0 services are as follows: 52NS3, 52NQ2,52ND2, and 52NS2.

l The cards support the grooming of ODU0 services only in the synchronous mode. Thecards, however, do not support the grooming of ODU0 services in the asynchronous mode.

NOTE

In the synchronous mode, the cards (including tributary and line cards) that support the grooming ofODU0 services work with synchronous cross-connect cards. The cross-connect card can be the52XCH cards.

l Only ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 trails can be created. ODU5G and ODU3 trails cannot becreated, but can be searched.

l If no cross-connect card (for example, XCS card) is available, the tributary card and linecard must be installed in paired slots of the same subrack.

l During the installation of cross-connect card (for example, XCS card), the tributary cardand line card must be installed on the same subrack.

l An ODU1 trail cannot be created on an OTU1 server trail formed by the networking of theTQS cards.

l Currently, two types of cards support the inverse multiplexing trail. The TSXL cardsupports the inverse multiplexing of the 40 Gbit/s service and the TDX card supports theinverse multiplexing of the 10 Gbit/s service

l The U2000 supports the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.l The U2000 does not support the ability to create a trail whose source and sink use the same

subrack.l The U2000 does not support the ability to create a trail that is terminated at one end.

An example of the ODUk networking scenario is as follows:

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 65: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

RX1 TX1LP1 ODU1

OUT IN

LP1ODU1

ODU1

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

ODU2

ODU1

OCh Trail

OTU2 Trail

ODU2 Trail

ODU1 Trail

Client Trail

Electrical Signal

Optical Signal

NS2 NS2TQS TQSSTM-16 STM-16

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire networkin an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered anddisplayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level orhigher levels between NEs.

l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered whenyou specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.

l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you createa trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 Set the level, rate and direction of the service.

Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,select the NE, card, and port.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.

1. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails andset them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmostserver trail.

2. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-29

Page 66: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

4. Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channeldialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail and the channel for the working route.

5. Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links ofthe OCh level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. Afterroutes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click thetrail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In thedialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trailagain to cancel the selection.

l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NEof the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of thetrail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is markedwith sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail ChannelSelection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailand the channel for the working route.

Step 5 Optional: Configure protection. Click the Protection Setting tab. Configure the SNCPprotection route.1. Set the dual fed node and selective receiving node. Right-click the area in the tab and choose

Add from the shortcut menu. In the Add the dual-fed and selective-receiving nodedisplayed, select Dual-Fed Point and Selective-Receiving Point. Click OK.

2. Specify the protection route channel. Click Protection Setting. In the Specify RouteChannel dialog box, specify the topmost server trail and the channel for the protectionroute and click OK.

3. Click Delete Protection Setting.TIPAfter you click the Protection Setting tab, you can configure the SNCP protection route in the topologyview. After routes are successfully calculated, the protection route is displayed in pink between the sourceand sink NEs.

l Specify the dual fed node. Right-click the dual-fed point and choose Set Dual-Fed Point, and the NE

is displayed as .

l Specify the selective receiving node. Right-click the selective-receiving point and choose Set Selective-

Receiving Point, and the NE is displayed as .

l Specify the protection route channel. Right-click the protection route in pink and choose Specify RouteChannel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailand the channel for the protection route.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 67: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTEAfter routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created and the listof new dynamic cross-connections are displayed in the lower portion of the topology view.

l Click the About Server Layer Route tab. In the list, right-click a route and then perform the followingoperations:

l Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM TrailManagement window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail tobe created. The fiber does not support this function.

l Choose Path Setting from the shortcut menu. You can modify the channel for the server trail.

l Click Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.

l If the trail traverses ASON domains, you can select SPC First and click the ASON Trail ParameterSetting tab to set ASON attributes.

Step 6 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,including the name and ID.

Step 7 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the followingoperations as required.

l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after itis created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on theU2000.

l Select the Copy after Creation check box. Then, you can create multiple trails whose sharethe same routes but have different channels.

l If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trailsuccessfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn therelevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Powerfor the Trails.

Step 8 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where allor part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For detailsof parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result

After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails

The U2000 supports creating client trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 generates a client trail based on the searched or created servertrail. The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner inapplication scenarios such as deployment or expansion.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-31

Page 68: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l An OCh or ODUk server trail is correctly searched out or created.

l If the source or sink is the TOM or 12LQMS card, you must set the working mode of thecard first. For details, see 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.

l If the source or sink is the TOM or TQM card, you must set the service type at the port onthe card first. For details, see 2.6.4 Configuring the Service Type.

l If the 11TOM or 12LQMD cards are configured at the source or sink ends, you mustconfigure the service mode for the cards when certain services, such as OTU1 services,traverse the cards. For details, see 2.6.2 Configuring the Service Mode.

ContextThe restrictions for configuring cross-connections and networking are as follows:

l The working route and protection route of WXCP/SNCP trails must be different servertrails.

l Currently, the U2000 only supports the Client trails created based on the ODUk server trailsin a network composed all by NG WDM equipment. The server trail can be ODU1 trail,ODU5G trail and ODU2 trail.

l The U2000 supports the creation and search for the Client trails using the SW SNCPscheme.

l For the dual-fed OTU, if services are configured at only one port, the client trail cannot becreated even if the OCh trail is searched out.

l The U2000 supports the ability to create a mono nodal trail.

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire networkin an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered anddisplayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level orhigher levels between NEs.

l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered whenyou specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.

l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you createa trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 Set the level, rate and direction of the service.

Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,select the NE, card, and port.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.1. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut

menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails andset them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmostserver trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 69: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4. Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channeldialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail and the channel for the working route.

5. Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links ofthe OCh level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. Afterroutes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click thetrail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In thedialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trailagain to cancel the selection.

l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NEof the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of thetrail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is markedwith sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail ChannelSelection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailand the channel for the working route.

Step 5 Optional: Configure protection. Click the Protection Setting tab. Configure the SNCPprotection route.1. Set the dual fed node and selective receiving node. Right-click the area in the tab and choose

Add from the shortcut menu. In the Add the dual-fed and selective-receiving nodedisplayed, select Dual-Fed Point and Selective-Receiving Point. Click OK.

2. Specify the protection route channel. Click Protection Setting. In the Specify RouteChannel dialog box, specify the topmost server trail and the channel for the protectionroute and click OK.

3. Click Delete Protection Setting.TIPAfter you click the Protection Setting tab, you can configure the SNCP protection route in the topologyview. After routes are successfully calculated, the protection route is displayed in pink between the sourceand sink NEs.

l Specify the dual fed node. Right-click the dual-fed point and choose Set Dual-Fed Point, and the NE

is displayed as .

l Specify the selective receiving node. Right-click the selective-receiving point and choose Set Selective-

Receiving Point, and the NE is displayed as .

l Specify the protection route channel. Right-click the protection route in pink and choose Specify RouteChannel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailand the channel for the protection route.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-33

Page 70: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTEAfter routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created and the listof new dynamic cross-connections are displayed in the lower portion of the topology view.

l Click the About Server Layer Route tab. In the list, right-click a route and then perform the followingoperations:

l Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM TrailManagement window. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail tobe created. The fiber does not support this function.

l Choose Path Setting from the shortcut menu. You can modify the channel for the server trail.

l Click Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.

l If the trail traverses ASON domains, you can select SPC First and click the ASON Trail ParameterSetting tab to set ASON attributes.

Step 6 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,including the name and ID.

Step 7 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the followingoperations as required.l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it

is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on theU2000.

l Select the Copy after Creation check box. Then, you can create multiple trails whose sharethe same routes but have different channels.

l If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trailsuccessfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn therelevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Powerfor the Trails.

Step 8 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where allor part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For detailsof parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

ResultAfter refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

2.1.4.4 Creating a Mono Nodal TrailThe trails created on the same NE are called mono nodal trails. A mono nodal trail is createdbased on inter-card cross-connections. If the inter-card cross-connection is not supported, a mononodal trail is created based on fibers.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 71: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l Only the mono nodal trails of the Client and ODUk levels can be created.

l Server trails are required if trails are created based on fibers between different cards.

Context

There are two circumstances if the source and sink of a mono nodal trail belong to the same NE.

l Trails created with a single cross-connection based on inter-card cross-connections or intra-card cross-connections: These trails do not pass through fibers and are added or droppedon different cards of the same NE or different ports of the same card.

l Trails created between different cards based on fibers (with fiber connection betweencards): These trails pass through fibers and different cards. When creating a mono nodaltrail, check whether server OCh trails and server ODUk trails exist between cards. If yes,the mono nodal trail can be created.

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire networkin an intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered anddisplayed in the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OCh level orhigher levels between NEs.

l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered whenyou specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails,an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.

l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you createa trail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.

Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,select the NE, card, and port.

Step 4 Optional: If the trail passes through fibers:

1. Click the Trail Setting tab and set the explicit link and excluded node as required in theRoute Constraint area.

2. Click Specify Route Channel. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.

3. Select Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel as required, and clickOK.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,including the name and ID.

Step 6 Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following operations asrequired.

l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after itis created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on theU2000.

l If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trailsuccessfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn the

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-35

Page 72: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

relevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Powerfor the Trails.

Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where allor part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For detailsof parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result

After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

2.1.4.5 Creating a Multi-Layer OTN Trail

When you create a Client trail or an ODUk trail for the NG WDM, an intermediate server trailis automatically created at the OCh server layer without creating the trail at each layer. Thissimplifies the operations.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l NG WDM equipment must be used for networking.

l Only multi-layer Client trails and ODUk trails can be created.

l Optical-layer OCh trails must exist.

Context

On a network consisting of the NG WDM equipment, when you create a multi-layer trail, thecorresponding intermediate server trail, such as the OTU, ODU1, and ODU2 trail, isautomatically created at the OCh server layer during route calculation.

The procedures of creating a multi-layer trail are the same as the procedures of creating a normaltrail.

Procedure

Step 1 Create a multi-layer trail by following the procedures of creating a normal trail.

To Create See

Client trail 2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails

ODUk trail 2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail

----End

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 73: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.5 Creating a Platinum ServiceIn a platinum service group, the WDM trails do not pass through the same NE, fiber or fiber/cable pipe, so that the risk that multiple trails are interrupted is lowered.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

l Only the Client and ODUk platinum services can be created.

l The levels of the trails in a platinum service group must be consistent.

Context

The procedures of creating a platinum trail are almost the same as the procedures of creating anon-platinum service, that is, normal service. The only difference is that you need to select areference trail for a platinum service. If a reference trail is selected, a platinum service group iscreated at the same time. Otherwise, a non-platinum service (normal service) is created.

During the creation of a platinum service, if a reference trail is selected, the U2000 automaticallyfilters out the NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe that the reference trail passes through to calculatea new route. If this reference trail already belongs to a certain platinum service group, theU2000 also considers other trails in the platinum service group as reference trails to calculate anew route.

If the U2000 cannot calculate a route after filtering out the NE, fiber, and fiber/cable pipe thatthe reference trail passes through, the U2000 reduces the restrictions. Then, the U2000 calculatesa relatively appropriate route that passes through the preceding NE, fiber, or fiber/cable pipe tocontinue the creation. Therefore, a downgraded platinum service group is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Create the trail in the platinum service group according to the procedures of creating a non-platinum service.

To Create See

Client trail 2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails

ODUk trail 2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail

Step 2 In the Router Constraint area, click the Platinum Service Group tab.

Step 3 Right-click the blank area, and then choose Add from the shortcut menu. In the Set Trail BrowseFilter Conditions dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and then click Filter. The trailsthat meet the criteria are displayed in the list.

Step 4 Select one or more trails of the same level as reference trails, and click OK.

NOTE

If the new trail and the reference trail cannot fully comply with the requirements of the platinum service,in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Then, in the Calculate Platinum Service Trail dialogbox displayed, determine whether to create the downgraded platinum service group. To create thedowngraded platinum service group, click Yes. Otherwise, click No.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-37

Page 74: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 5 Finish other settings and then click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, clickClose.

NOTE

If you select Port Attribute, the Port Information dialog box is displayed. In the list, the ports where allor part of the attributes can be modified are displayed. Double-click the required port to modify. For detailsof parameters, see Configure Port.

----End

Result

After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new platinum service.The Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status parameters indicate theservice group that the trail belongs to and the service group status.

NOTE

By default, the WDM Trail Management window does not display the Platinum Service Group ID andPlatinum Service Group Status parameters. You can display these two parameters by right-clicking thetable head and choosing Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status,

The Platinum Service Group Status field can refresh the status of each trail in the service group in realtime.

l Normal indicates that the trail is a platinum service.

l Degrade indicates that the trail is a degraded platinum service.

l - indicates that the trail is not a platinum service.

The system automatically allocates Platinum Service Group ID incrementally. The trails with the sameID belong to the same platinum service group.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

2.1.6 Binding a Platinum Service GroupYou can bind a trail or trails when you need to add an existing trail to a platinum service groupor bind existing trails as a platinum service group.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

l Only the Client trails or ODUk trails can be bound.

l The levels of the trails to be bound must be the same.

l One trail cannot be bound to multiple platinum groups.

Context

The platinum service group can be bound in the following two scenarios:

l A platinum service group already exists. One or more non-platinum services need to beadded.

l Bind multiple non-platinum services to a platinum service group.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 75: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

In the preceding two scenarios, the levels of the trails must be the same. That is, in the firstscenario, the level of the trail to be added must be the same as the platinum service group. In thesecond scenario, the levels of all trails must be the same.

After the binding, the U2000 automatically checks whether the trails in the platinum servicegroup meet the requirements.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select all the trails that you want to bind, right-click, and then choose Bind Platinum ServiceGroup from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

ResultYou can view the ID and status of a platinum service group in the Platinum Service GroupID and Platinum Service Group Status fields.

NOTE

By default, the WDM Trail Management window does not display the Platinum Service Group ID andPlatinum Service Group Status parameters. You can display these two parameters by right-clicking thetable head and choosing Platinum Service Group ID and Platinum Service Group Status,

The Platinum Service Group Status field can refresh the status of each trail in the service group in realtime.

l Normal indicates that the trail is a platinum service.

l Degrade indicates that the trail is a degraded platinum service.

l - indicates that the trail is not a platinum service.

The system automatically allocates Platinum Service Group ID incrementally. The trails with the sameID belong to the same platinum service group.

2.1.7 Service Authorization ManagementIf there are multiple service trails maintained by different operators, they may care about onlythe trails in their own responsibility but ignore the other services. Service authorization can filterthe information not in concern of an operator, who then views and manages only the trails in theresponsibility. In this manner, the management and maintenance efficiency is improved.

Figure 2-15 shows four service trails. Trails 1-2 are maintained by operator A and trails 3-4 aremaintained by operator B. By means of service authorization, operator A can maintain only trails1-2 and cannot maintain trails 3-4 on the U2000. Similarly, operator B cannot maintain trails1-2.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-39

Page 76: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-15 Service authorization management

Trail 1NE1

NE3

NE4NE2

Trail 4Trail 3

Trail 2

You can authorize a service to an U2000 user in two modes:

l Directly authorize the service to an U2000 user.

l Specify a customer for the service and authorize the customer to an U2000 user.

Service authorization management must meet the following conditions:

l A license for service authorization management must be available.

l The U2000 user has the operation rights related to service authorization.

2.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a ServiceYou can logically group services for management by specifying customers for them.

2.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 UserWhen you authorizing a customer to a U2000 user, you also authorize all the services specifiedfor the customer to the U2000 user.

2.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 UserBy authorizing a trail to a U2000 user, the U2000 user manages only the trail but ignores othertrails.

2.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization InformationYou can view, modify, and delete trail authorization information, if necessary.

2.1.7.1 Specifying a Customer for a Service

You can logically group services for management by specifying customers for them.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-basedauthorization (transport domain) right.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 77: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l The service and the customer to be specified for the service must exist.

Contextl You can not specify customers for OTS, OMS, OSC level trails.

l You can also specify a customer for a trail when creating the trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and clickFilter All. The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.

l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails thatare already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail and choose Details from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click Customer and select a customer for the service from the drop-down list.

NOTE

The U2000 provides a fuzzy query function, with which you can quickly search for a specific customerout of many customers.

Customers of ASON-WDM trails and ASON-SDH trails can also be configured in the ASON trailmanagement window. Therefore, customers configured in this step must be the same as those configuredin the ASON trail management window.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

2.1.7.2 Authorizing a Customer to a U2000 User

When you authorizing a customer to a U2000 user, you also authorize all the services specifiedfor the customer to the U2000 user.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.

l The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-basedauthorization (transport domain) right.

l The U2000 user and the customer to be authorized to the U2000 user must exist.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > Customer Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Right-click the customer and choose Authorize to User from the shortcut menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-41

Page 78: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select the U2000 user from Available Users in the pane on the left,

and then click .

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.1.7.3 Authorizing a Trail to a U2000 UserBy authorizing a trail to a U2000 user, the U2000 user manages only the trail but ignores othertrails.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.l The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based

authorization (transport domain) right.l The U2000 user to which the trail is to be authorized must exist and must have the rights

of network maintainer, network operator, or network monitor.l The trail to be authorized must exist.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and clickFilter All. The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.

l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails thatare already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail and choose Confer Rights to User from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the U2000 user from Available Users in the pane on the left,

and then click .

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

2.1.7.4 Modifying Trail Authorization InformationYou can view, modify, and delete trail authorization information, if necessary.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.l The U2000 user that performs such an operation must have the Right- and domain-based

authorization (transport domain) right.l A trail or customer must be authorized to a U2000 user.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 79: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Service Authority from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select the user from the User List pane in the displayed window.

Step 3 In the pane on the right, view, modify, or delete the trails authorized to the user.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.1.8 Viewing WDM TrailsThis section describes how to view the connection relation of all boards on a WDM NE.

2.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM TrailThe U2000 provides the transmission media route of the trails. You can view the transmissionmedia layer route to find out the transmission media of the trail.

2.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM TrailThe U2000 provides the signal flow diagram for trails. In the signal flow diagram, you can viewfiber connections between cards on NEs. The signal flow diagram visually displays the flowdirection of optical signals, and facilitates operation and maintenance.

2.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow DiagramInside the WDM NE, the signal flow is transmitted from the OTU to the demultiplexer ormultiplexer, or from the demultiplexer or multiplexer to the optical amplifier. This sectiondescribes how to view the actual signal flow inside a WDM optical NE.

2.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE PanelAn NE panel displays the boards and ports of the NE. The icons of all parts use different colorsto show the current status. You can view the NE panel of the NE that a trail passes through inthe Trail Management window.

2.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client TrailsAt a level higher than sever trails, client trails are used to carry services. By using the U2000,you can view the client trail information of a specified trail.

2.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server TrailsThe U2000 supports querying related server trails. By using this function, you can learn aboutthe information including status and attributes of a server trail related to the desired trail.

2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the TrailsYou can query the optical power for trails. The U2000 provides a way to manage the opticalpower that is related to the NE layout, topology structure and routing.

2.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection TrailsU2000 supports the function of displaying associated working and protection trails of an opticalNE on an optical layer trail. Through the function of querying a WDM trail, you can view theother associated working and protection trails of a trail in the trail list.

2.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a TrailDuring service planning or fault location, you need to query or collect statistics on theinformation about the fibers that a trail traverses. The U2000 provides the function of queryinginformation about the fibers that a trail occupies.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-43

Page 80: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.8.1 Viewing Route Information of WDM TrailThe U2000 provides the transmission media route of the trails. You can view the transmissionmedia layer route to find out the transmission media of the trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trails must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Choose a trail and click Transmission Media Layer Route in the bottom portion of the window.The transmission media is displayed in the bottom window.

NOTEHover the cursor over the trail and the source and sink port information of this route is displayed.

----End

2.1.8.2 Viewing the Signal Flow Diagram for a WDM TrailThe U2000 provides the signal flow diagram for trails. In the signal flow diagram, you can viewfiber connections between cards on NEs. The signal flow diagram visually displays the flowdirection of optical signals, and facilitates operation and maintenance.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l There must be correct WDM trails.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, and select the Signal Flow Diagram tab in the bottom portion of the window. Thesignal flow direction of the entire trail is shown.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 81: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

Hover the cursor on a trail to display the source and sink port information of that section of the route.

Step 4 Optional: Right-click on the view of signal flow diagram, and choose Legend from the shortcutmenu. The fibers related to the trail are displayed in the signal flow diagram. Dotted linesrepresent intra-station fibers and real lines represents inter-station fibers.

NOTE

When there are OLP cards in a network, the working route and protection route are displayed differently in thesignal flow diagram for the selection of signals on the sink port. The following are two display modes for dual-fed signals on the source port:

l If the source and sink ports of the OLP card are managed by the same U2000, the working route and protectionroute are displayed differently in the signal flow diagram.

l If the source and sink ports of the OLP card are managed by different U2000s, you can specify whether todisplay the protection route to meet the actual requirements. By default, the protection route is not displayedin the case of dual-fed signals on the source port.

Step 5 Customize the name that is displayed in the signal flow diagram. Such a name can contain theinformation, such as the shelf name and slot number of a card and the wavelength and frequencythat a trail occupies.

1. In the signal flow diagram, right-click, and choose Display Mode from the shortcut menu.On the right of the Signal Flow Diagram pane, the Display Mode tab page is displayed.

2. Select the parameter that you want to display in the signal flow diagram and click Save. Inthe Signal Flow Diagram, the display of names are refreshed according to the new settings.

NOTE

l In the case of an optical-layer trail, the Hide cards at the optical layer parameter is grayed out.

l In the case of an electrical-layer trail, only the cards that the electrical-layer cross-connections traverseare displayed at the source and sink ends and the optical-layer links are displayed in dotted lines betweenthe source and sink ends in the Signal Flow Diagram when you select Hide cards at the opticallayer.

Step 6 Optional: If a fiber is displayed in red in the signal flow diagram, right-click it, and chooseBrowse Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. The Browse Current Alarms window isdisplayed for you to view the alarms of the fiber cut.

NOTE

l You can select only a fiber to view its current alarms.

l Only the R_LOS and MUT_LOS alarms are supported. Otherwise, No occurrence time condition isselected is displayed in the Browse Current Alarms window.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-45

Page 82: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 7 Optional: To query the current working route of a trail, select the trail, right-click on the viewof signal flow diagram, and then choose Display valid routes from the shortcut menu. The validpositive working route is highlighted in green, while the valid negative working route ishighlighted in orange.

NOTE

l The auto-refresh function of the valid routes is supported.

l This function does to support trail groups.

Step 8 Optional: In the signal flow diagram, right-click a card and perform the following operations:

l Choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu to view the alarms of the cardon the current trail.

l Choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu to view the performance data of thecard on the current trail.

l If the selected trail supports Ethernet performance, choose Ethernet Performance fromthe shortcut menu to view the Ethernet performance events of the card on the current trail.

l Choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer andconfigure the port attributes of the card.

Step 9 Optional: In the signal flow diagram, right-click the blank area and choose Save View from theshortcut menu to save the coordinates of the icons in the diagram.

NOTEAfter modifying the coordinates of an icon in the signal flow diagram, you can perform the Save Viewfunction. The modified view that you save is displayed when you open the signal flow diagram of the trailagain.

----End

ResultAfter you perform operations, for example, customizing a name displayed and saving a view,in the Signal Flow Diagram, the settings takes effect on only the current U2000 client.

2.1.8.3 Viewing the WDM Single Station Signal Flow Diagram

Inside the WDM NE, the signal flow is transmitted from the OTU to the demultiplexer ormultiplexer, or from the demultiplexer or multiplexer to the optical amplifier. This sectiondescribes how to view the actual signal flow inside a WDM optical NE.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l You can only view the single station signal flow diagram of the occupied optical NE.

Procedure

Step 1 In the topology view, double-click an occupied optical NE, and the NE Panel dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 2 Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab to view the single station signal flow diagram of the opticalNE.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 83: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 Optional: Right-click a board, and choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menu toview the information of the alarms, performance, relevant trails, fibers or optical port parameters.You can rotate the board placement direction at 90, 180 or 270 degrees.

Step 4 Optional: Right-click in the blank, and choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menuto print or save the view, or search for a specified board.l Choose Print from the shortcut menu, and the Print dialog box is displayed. After setting

the printing information, click Print.l Choose Save View from the shortcut menu, and the Information dialog box is displayed.

Click OK.l Choose Find Board from the shortcut menu, and the Find Board dialog box is displayed.

Enter the desired board name in the Search field, and select Up or Down as the searchingdirection. The board you select in the Board Name column is simultaneously located inthe topology view of the signal flow diagram.

----End

2.1.8.4 Viewing the WDM NE Panel

An NE panel displays the boards and ports of the NE. The icons of all parts use different colorsto show the current status. You can view the NE panel of the NE that a trail passes through inthe Trail Management window.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l WDM trails must be searched out or created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-47

Page 84: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail from the list and click the Transmission Media Layer Route tab in the lower partof the window.

Step 4 Right-click the required NE in the route diagram, and then choose NE Panel from the shortcutmenu.

----End

ResultBy default, the system displays the NE panel of a shelf NE that the trail passes through. If thetrail passes through multiple shelf NEs, the system displays the NE panel of only one shelf NE.

2.1.8.5 Viewing Relevant Client Trails

At a level higher than sever trails, client trails are used to carry services. By using the U2000,you can view the client trail information of a specified trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l The WDM trail must be created or searched out.

Context

In the network models specified in the ITU-T G.872 and G.805, the OTN transport network isdivided.That is, each layer manages its own overheads and each layer can be classified into sub-layers and the relationship between the adjacent layers is client and server.

A connection of the client layer is carried by an adjacent server trail for transmission. Forexample, the link connection of a OCh trail is provided by a OMS trail, while the link connectionof a Client trail is provided by an OCh or ODUk trail. The OMS layer is the server layer of theOCh layer, and the OCh trail is the client trail of the OMS layer. The OCh or ODUk layer is theserver trail of the Client layer, and the Client trail is the client trail of the OCh or ODUk trail.For details of the trail models, refer to 2.1.2.1 WDM Trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 85: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.

l Click Incremental Filter to add newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that arealready displayed.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Client Trails from the shortcut menu. Thecorresponding client trails are displayed in the trail list.

----End

2.1.8.6 Browsing Related Server Trails

The U2000 supports querying related server trails. By using this function, you can learn aboutthe information including status and attributes of a server trail related to the desired trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l A WDM trail must be searched out or created.l OTS trails do not support querying related server trails.

Context

In the network models specified in the ITU-T G.872 and G.805, the OTN transport network isdivided.That is, each layer manages its own overheads and each layer can be classified into sub-layers and the relationship between the adjacent layers is client and server.

A connection of the client layer is carried by an adjacent server trail for transmission. Forexample, the link connection of a OCh trail is provided by a OMS trail, while the link connectionof a Client trail is provided by an OCh or ODUk trail. The OMS layer is the server layer of theOCh layer, and the OCh trail is the client trail of the OMS layer. The OCh or ODUk layer is theserver trail of the Client layer, and the Client trail is the client trail of the OCh or ODUk trail.For details of the trail models, refer to 2.1.2.1 WDM Trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Related Server Layer Trails from the shortcut menu.This trail and the related server trails are displayed in the user interface.

Step 4 You can select another trail to continue the query.

----End

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-49

Page 86: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Power for the TrailsYou can query the optical power for trails. The U2000 provides a way to manage the opticalpower that is related to the NE layout, topology structure and routing.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trails must be correctly created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and clickFilter All. The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.

l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails thatare already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Query Relevant Optical Power from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Optical Power Management window displayed, click the Table tab. Click Query toquery the optical power information of ports from the NE. In the Operation Result dialog boxdisplayed, click Close.

NOTE

In the View tab, move the cursor on a link. The U2000 shows the optical power information of all fibersin the link.

Step 5 Click the Spectrum Analysis Info tab, and click Query. In the Operation Result dialog boxdisplayed, click Close.

NOTE

l If a trail traverses the multiplexer/demultiplexer card whose MON ports are connected to spectrumanalyzers, you can choose Spectrum Analyze > Source or Spectrum Analyze > Sink to switch to thespectrum analysis window of the NE Explorer. In this window, you can view the details of the spectrumanalyzers. This function is available only when a spectrum analyzer exists.

l You can query the single-wavelength optical power about only optical-layer trails.

l By querying the single-wavelength optical power, you can clearly learn the single-wavelength opticalpower of a trail in the U2000 user interface.

l Due to the factors, such as the split ratio and optical interface attenuation of the optical spectrumanalyzer card, the optical power value of each path after analysis has a fixed deviation from the actualvalue. You can set Compensation Power(dBm) to keep consistency between the analysis value thatis displayed in the U2000 user interface and the actual value.

Step 6 Click the Graphic tab to query the graphic interface of the port optical power.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 87: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l Green indicates that the current optical power is in the normal range.

l Orange indicates that the current power exceeds the reference deviation and there is an exception.

l Black "E" shape in the histogram indicates the allowable deviation range of the optical power.

----End

2.1.8.8 Browsing Associated Working and Protection Trails

U2000 supports the function of displaying associated working and protection trails of an opticalNE on an optical layer trail. Through the function of querying a WDM trail, you can view theother associated working and protection trails of a trail in the trail list.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l There must be created or searched WDM trails.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, right click and select the Browse Associated Working/Protection Trails.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-51

Page 88: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

If there are associated working and protection trails, they are displayed with the selected trail on the trailmanagement interface. If there are no associated working and protection trails, only the selected trail is displayed.

----End

2.1.8.9 Viewing the Fiber Information of a TrailDuring service planning or fault location, you need to query or collect statistics on theinformation about the fibers that a trail traverses. The U2000 provides the function of queryinginformation about the fibers that a trail occupies.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The trail must be created.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Fibers from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Fiber/Cable Management window, the list of the fibers that the trail traverses is displayedfor you to learn details.

NOTE

l The following is not supported: select a trail of the Group level to view the fibers that the trail traverses;select multiple trails at the same time to view the fibers that the trails traverse.

l If a mono nodal trail does not traverse any fiber, no information is displayed in the correspondingFiber/Cable Management window.

----End

2.1.9 Maintaining WDM TrailsThe end-to-end trails are carriers of services of the customers. In the routine maintenance, theadministrator and maintainer must find out the status of the trails to ensure that all the servicesare transmitted correctly.

2.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM TrailsDeactivating WDM trails deletes the related services from the NE side and saves the relevantdata on the U2000 to release the occupied path resource. Activating trails enables the serviceson the WDM trails according to the trail data that is saved on the U2000.

2.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection InformationThe U2000 provides cross-connection information about trails higher than the OCh level. Youcan view dynamic cross-connections of these trails and of their corresponding server trails.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 89: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM TrailThe U2000 can lock out some important trails. After lockout, you can only query the lockedWDM trails but not delete, activate, or rename them. Locking or unlocking a WDM trail doesnot affect services that are running.

2.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM TrailThis section describes how to query the 1+1 protection status for a WDM trail from the networklayer.

2.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM TrailYou can perform 1+1 protection switching for a WDM trail.

2.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM TrailThis section describes how to query the WXCP or SNCP protection state of a WDM trail fromthe network layer.

2.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM TrailThe U2000 supports performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in theend-to-end mode. Performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the end-to-end mode is more direct and easier than that on the per-NE basis.

2.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM TrailThis section describes how to query the DPPS protection state of a WDM trail from the networklayer.

2.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh TrailYou can use the U2000 to configure the overhead bytes of the trail node through the overheadmanagement function of the OTU layer that corresponds to the end-to-end OCh trail.

2.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM TrailIn this user interface, you can modify the optical power adjustment modes for the optical cross-connection ports on the source and sink and intermediate NEs of a trail at a time.

2.1.9.1 Activating/Deactivating WDM TrailsDeactivating WDM trails deletes the related services from the NE side and saves the relevantdata on the U2000 to release the occupied path resource. Activating trails enables the serviceson the WDM trails according to the trail data that is saved on the U2000.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The Client, ODUk, OTUk or OCh trail must be created.

Context

CAUTIONDeactivating WDM trails may interrupt the services.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-53

Page 90: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Select one or more trails, right-click and choose Deactivate.

Step 4 Optional: Select one or more trails, right-click and choose Activate.NOTEIf a certain server trail carries an active client trail or a partially active client trail, you need to deactivatethe client trail and then the server trail.

Step 5 Click OK in the Confirm window and the Reconfirm window displayed. A prompt appearstelling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.2 Querying Cross-Connection InformationThe U2000 provides cross-connection information about trails higher than the OCh level. Youcan view dynamic cross-connections of these trails and of their corresponding server trails.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The trail must be higher than the OCh level. The OMS and OTS trails cannot be queried.l The cross-connection must be a dynamic cross-connection. A static cross-connection

cannot be queried.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail and click the Cross-Connection Information tab in the lower pane. The dynamiccross-connections of the trail are displayed in a list.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 91: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l Select the Service layer check box. The dynamic cross-connections of the corresponding server trailare also displayed in the list.

l In the case of a partly inactive trail, the activation state of its dynamic cross-connection can beActive, Inactive, and Deleted.l Active: indicates that the dynamic cross-connection is active.l Inactive: indicates that the dynamic cross-connection is inactive.l Deleted: indicates that the inactive dynamic cross-connection is deleted from an NE. Moreover,

trail search is not performed and the corresponding trail still exists on the NMS, but the dynamiccross-connection is in the Deleted state.

----End

2.1.9.3 Locking or Unlocking a WDM TrailThe U2000 can lock out some important trails. After lockout, you can only query the lockedWDM trails but not delete, activate, or rename them. Locking or unlocking a WDM trail doesnot affect services that are running.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network administrator" authority or higher.l The WDM trail must be created.

ContextNOTE

l After you lock out a trail, when you configure the trail on a per-NE basis, you cannot activate, deactivate,delete, or modify the cross-connection used by the trail. In the WDM Trail Management window,right-click a trail but some commands are grayed out in the shortcut menu. The commands areDelete, Delete from Network Layer, Activate, Deactivate, and Name.

l If the locked trail exists at the client layer, you can create client trails on this trail.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Right-click a trail and choose Lock or Unlock from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

2.1.9.4 Querying the 1+1 Protection for a WDM TrailThis section describes how to query the 1+1 protection status for a WDM trail from the networklayer.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-55

Page 92: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l The optical line protection or 1+1 protection groups must be configured.

l Trail search must be performed properly.

l Applies to Client, OCh, and OMS trails.

Context

You can query the status and parameters of inter-board 1+1 protection, intra board 1+1protection, client-side 1+1 protection, optical line protection, 1+1 optical path protection, andinter-subrack 1+1 protection for a trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 In the WDM Trail Management view, select a trail that is configured with the 1+1 protection.Click Maintenance and choose WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings from the drop-downmenu. The WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings window is displayed. The 1+1 protectioninformation of the WDM trail is shown in the window.

Step 4 Select a protection group of WDM trails. Click Function and select Query Switching Status.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.5 Performing 1+1 Protection Switching for a WDM Trail

You can perform 1+1 protection switching for a WDM trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The 1+1 protection status of the WDM trail is queried.

l A trail search must be performed properly.

l Applies to Client, OCh or OMS trails.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 93: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Context

CAUTIONl If you perform the forced switching when the protection channel is faulty, services are

interrupted.l After you perform lockout of switching, manual switching, and forced switching

successfully, you need to clear these settings after the working channel returns to normal.Otherwise, the switching cannot be performed automatically even when the currently activechannel is faulty. As a result, services are interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a client trail that has WDM 1+1 protection, click Maintenance and select WDM Trail1+1 Parameter Settings.

Step 4 Select a trail in the WDM Trail 1+1 Parameter Settings window. Right-click in the CurrentStatus field and choose Force to Working or any of the other switching operations. In theConfirm dialog box, confirm the operation. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful.

NOTE

You need to confirm the operation only when performing the forced switching and trail locking.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.6 Querying the WXCP/SNCP Protection of a WDM TrailThis section describes how to query the WXCP or SNCP protection state of a WDM trail fromthe network layer.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l A trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection must be configured.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-57

Page 94: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail with WXCP or SNCP in the WDM Trail Management window. Click theMaintenance button and select WXCP/SNCP Service Control from the drop-down list. TheWXCP/SNCP Service Control window is displayed, indicating the WXCP or SNCPinformation of the WDM trail.

Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail and click Query.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.7 Performing the WXCP/SNCP Protection Switching for a WDM Trail

The U2000 supports performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in theend-to-end mode. Performing the WXCP or SNCP protection switching for the trails in the end-to-end mode is more direct and easier than that on the per-NE basis.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l A trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection must be configured.

Context

CAUTIONl If you perform the forced switching when the protection channel is faulty, services are

interrupted.

l After you perform lockout of switching, manual switching, and forced switchingsuccessfully, you need to clear these settings after the working channel returns to normal.Otherwise, the switching cannot be performed automatically even when the currently activechannel is faulty. As a result, services are interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 95: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 In the WDM Trail Management view, select a trail with the WXCP or SNCP protection. ClickMaintenance and select WXCP/SNCP Service Control from the drop-down list. The WXCP/SNCP Service Control window is displayed, indicating the WXCP or SNCP information of theWDM trail.

Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail. Click Function and select the forced or manualswitching from the drop-down list.The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.8 Querying the DPPS Protection of a WDM Trail

This section describes how to query the DPPS protection state of a WDM trail from the networklayer.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l A trail with the DPPS protection must be configured.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail with DPPS in the WDM Trail Management window. Click the Maintenancebutton and select DPPS Query from the drop-down list. The DPPS Protection window isdisplayed, indicating the DPPS information of the WDM trail.

Step 4 Select the protection group of this WDM trail and click Query, the DPPS information of theWDM trail is displayed.

----End

2.1.9.9 Configuring OTU Overhead on the OCh Trail

You can use the U2000 to configure the overhead bytes of the trail node through the overheadmanagement function of the OTU layer that corresponds to the end-to-end OCh trail.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-59

Page 96: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The OCh trail must be searched, and the source and sink OTU boards must support overhead

management.

Context

CAUTIONYou need to configure OTU overheads correctly. Otherwise, services may be interrupted.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select Overhead Management. The OTUOverhead window is displayed.

Step 4 Select a port from the object list. Right-click on the TTI to be Received or TTI to be Sentcolumn. Select the overhead bytes input mode.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 97: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received to automatically copy the contents of current overhead bytes receivedto the table.

l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the overhead bytes.

l The value of TTI Received must be the same as the value of TTI to be Received. Otherwise, theOTUk_TIM alarm is reported.

Option Description

Copy All Form Received Choose Copy All Form Received.

Manual Input Choose Manual Input. The Please input the overhead bytedialog box is displayed. Enter the information about SAPI,DAPI and Operator Specific. Click OK.NOTEl Source Flag and Sink Flag can contain up to 15 characters. User

Tag can contain up to 32 characters.

l When the Use the identifiers for the source and sink informationcheck box is selected, by default, the U2000 sets SAPI, DAPI, andOperator Specific according to the source and sink information.

Step 5 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 7 Click Close.

----End

2.1.9.10 Modifying the Optical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM TrailIn this user interface, you can modify the optical power adjustment modes for the optical cross-connection ports on the source and sink and intermediate NEs of a trail at a time.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The OCh trail with the dynamic cross-connection must exist.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select Set Optical Power Adjustment Mode fromthe drop-down list. The Set Optical Power Adjustment Mode dialog box is displayed.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-61

Page 98: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Select the port to be adjusted, right-click, and select Auto or Manual as required.

NOTE

When Adjustment Mode Status is set to Auto or Manual, you can modify the optical power adjustmentmode. Adjustment Mode Status has four values as follows: Manual, Auto, Inconsistent, and -.

l Manual: In this mode, you need to manually adjust the optical power of each optical cross-connectionport.

l Auto: In this mode, the optical power is automatically adjusted for each optical cross-connection port.

l Inconsistent: The optical cross-connection ports of a trail use different optical power adjustmentmodes.

l -: The trail does not support the function of setting the optical power adjustment mode, because nooptical cross-connections exists on the trail or only static cross-connections exist on the trail.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box, click OK.

----End

2.1.10 Modifying WDM TrailsDue to service requirements, sometimes, you need to modify the configuration of a WDM trail.U2000 supports manually modifying the source and sink of an exisiting WDM trail and the trailnames in batches, instead of creating WDM trails. This greatly simplifies the operations.

2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM TrailThis topic describes how to change the source, sink, and route of a WDM trail because of servicerequirements. The U2000 supports the ability to change a WDM trail manually without creatinga new WDM trail. This greatly simplifies the operations.

2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in BatchesThe network administrator can set the trail naming rules and modify trail names in batchesaccording to these rules.

2.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum ServiceYou can modify the trails that do not fully comply with the requirements of the platinum servicein the downgraded platinum service group. Therefore, the fully-compliant platinum servicegroup is created.

2.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service GroupWhen the platinum service protection is no longer required but the trail of the platinum serviceprotection needs to be retained, you can remove the trail from the platinum service group.

2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDM Trail

This topic describes how to change the source, sink, and route of a WDM trail because of servicerequirements. The U2000 supports the ability to change a WDM trail manually without creatinga new WDM trail. This greatly simplifies the operations.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The trail must be unlocked.l The trail must be an active Client or ODUk trail.l The trail must have only one source and one sink, and must have idle resources.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 99: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ContextThe configuration principles are as follows:l The OTU boards at the source and sink ends, such as the L4G, LOG, and LQG boards,

must support configuring cross-connections and must be installed on different NEs.l The source and sink of a trail represent specific service ports.l The U2000 does not support the ability to modify a cross-subrack WDM trail. If you want

to modify the sink end of a WDM trail, the sink end before modification and the sink endafter modification must reside in the same subrack.

CAUTIONl Modifying the source or sink of a trail interrupts services.l Deleting the protection route of a trail makes services unprotected.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select the required Client trail or ODUk trail from the list, and click Create/Modify > ModifyTrail in the lower part of the list. The Modify WDM Trail window is displayed.

Step 4 Optional: Change the source or sink of the trail. The ports before and after modification mustbelong to the same NE.1. Click Browse corresponding to Source to select a source port.2. Click Browse corresponding to Sink to select a sink port.

Step 5 Optional: Change the intermediate route of the trail.1. Click the Trail Setting tab. Change the explicit link, explicit node and excluded node in

the Route Constraint area.2. Click Specify Route Channel. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.3. Select new Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel as required, and

click OK.

Step 6 Optional: Change the protection route of the trail.1. Click the Protection Setting tab.2. Delete a protection route. To be specific, select the required route from the Route

Information list, and click Delete Protection.1. Add a protection route. To be specific, right-click Node List and then choose Add from

the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the SNCP protection route.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-63

Page 100: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2. Click Protection Setting. The Specify Route Channel dialog box is displayed.3. Select Server Layer Trail Name, Server Layer Trail, and Channel of the protection

route as required, and click OK.

Step 7 Click Finish, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, click Yes.

Step 8 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

Result1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu and select

the proper filter criteria for the trails.TIP

You can filter other trails according to the source and sink of the new trail.

2. In the WDM Trail Management user interface, find out that the trail is correctly modified.

2.1.10.2 Modifying Trail Names in Batches

The network administrator can set the trail naming rules and modify trail names in batchesaccording to these rules.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The trail naming rules must be set on the U2000.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.

l Click Incremental Filter to add newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that arealready displayed.

Step 3 Right-click one or more trails from the list, and choose Name from the shortcut menu. For thenaming rules, refer to Customizing Naming Rule.

Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.

----End

2.1.10.3 Changing the Route of a Platinum Service

You can modify the trails that do not fully comply with the requirements of the platinum servicein the downgraded platinum service group. Therefore, the fully-compliant platinum servicegroup is created.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 101: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The trail is not locked.

Context

The procedures of modifying a trail in a platinum service group are almost the same as theprocedures of modifying a non-platinum service, that is normal service. The differences aredescribed as follows:

l When a trail in the platinum service group is modified, the U2000 automatically considersother trails in the platinum service group as reference trails. Therefore, when calculatingthe route, the U2000 automatically filters out the available resources of the fibers in thefiber/cable pipe that the reference trails pass through.

l When the trail in the platinum service group is modified, the U2000 checks whether thetrails in the platinum service group meet the requirements of the platinum service.

Procedure

Step 1 Modify the trail in the platinum service group according to the procedures of modifying the non-platinum service. For details, see 2.1.10.1 Changing the Source, Sink, and Route of a WDMTrail.

----End

2.1.10.4 Removing a Trail from a Platinum Service Group

When the platinum service protection is no longer required but the trail of the platinum serviceprotection needs to be retained, you can remove the trail from the platinum service group.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l The U2000 license that is used must support platinum services.

l The platinum service group must be created.

ContextIf certain trails in a platinum service group are deleted or removed, the U2000 checks whetherthe remaining trails in the platinum service group meet the requirement.

Procedure

Step 1 Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box displayed, set the filter criteria and clickFilter All. The trails are displayed in the list.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-65

Page 102: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l Click Filter All to refresh and display all the qualified trails.l Click Secondary Filter to filter the trails that are already displayed.l Click Incremental Filter to add the newly qualified trails to the list without refreshing the trails that

are already displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the trail that you want to remove from the platinum service group and then chooseMove Out of Platinum Service Group from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

----End

2.1.11 Deleting a WDM TrailThe operation deletes the WDM trails from the network layer or from the NE layer. You needto delete the trails if the network will be adjusted or rebuilt.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The trail is not the OTS trail.l The trail must have the highest priority.l The trails that contain dynamic cross-connections must be deactivated before deleted. Other

trails can be directly deleted.

ContextA WDM trail can be deleted from the network side or the NE side.l If a trail is deleted from the network side, only the WDM trail at the network layer is deleted

on the U2000 side. The deleted trail is not delivered to the NE. Moreover, the service isnot affected. Generally, this method is adopted to synchronize the trail information on theU2000 side and the trail information at the network layer. After the trail is deleted from thenetwork layer, you can search for and find it again based on the service information at theNE layer.

l If a trail is deleted at the NE layer, the trail on the NE side is deleted accordingly. After thetrail is deleted, the service is interrupted. If the service configuration of the trail is incorrector needs to be modified, you can delete the trail at the NE layer and then create anothertrail.

l The U2000 supports the ability to delete a WDM trail and to delete a dynamic cross-connection related to the trail.

l The U2000 does not support the ability to delete the WDM trail that has a client trail.l The U2000 does not support the ability to delete an OTS trail.l Before you delete a WDM trail, the dynamic cross-connection related to the trail must be

inactive. If active, an error is displayed during the deletion.

CAUTIONDeleting the trails from NE layer will affect service.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 103: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Deleting WDM Trails from the NE Layer.1. Select the WDM trail that you want to delete, right-click it and choose Delete.2. In the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog boxes displayed, click OK. The operation is

complete.

Step 4 Optional: Deleting WDM Trails from the Network Layer.1. Select the WDM trail that you want to delete, right-click it and choose Delete from

Network Layer.2. In the Operation Result dialog boxes displayed, click Close.

----End

2.1.12 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on theOptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional method

This sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-to-end mode.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The Optical NE must be created as shown in Figure 2-16.l The NEs and boards must be created as shown in NE Panel.

ContextNetwork Design

The Project T constructs a ring network with station A, station B, station C and station D. Allthe equipments are OptiX Metro 6100V1E. Station A is an Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM)station. The station A has two back-to-back OTMs including two NEs. Station B, station C andstation D are Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM) stations. Each station has one NEs. Thenetwork design is shown in Figure 2-16.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-67

Page 104: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-16 Network Design

OADM

D

A

B

C

OTM

Slot Diagram

Figure 2-17 Station A

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 105: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-18 Station B

Figure 2-19 Station C

Figure 2-20 Station D

Service Requirements

In the network management center, the maintenance engineer is responsible for the servicedeployment and adjustment. Suppose that the engineer is familiar with all the services carriedby the WDM network. One of the routine tasks of this engineer is to deploy the GE level serviceto a wavelength. After receiving a request, the engineer must follow the request to configure aGE level service with WXCP from station A to station C.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-69

Page 106: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

1. Query the available resources of the WDM side.2. Search for WDM trails.3. Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.

Procedure

Step 1 Query the available resources of the WDM side.1. Choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > Statistics Report of WDM Client-Side

Port Resources from the Main Menu.2. Select the optical NE A and the optical NE C from the Navigation Tree. Click the double

arrow button to add the port resources of the two NEs to the statistics area at the right-handside.

3. Click Used Port and Unused Port to view the using status of each port.4. Record all the available resources.

Step 2 Search for WDM trails.1. Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking diagram.2. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.3. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

4. Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

5. Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTEIf no trails conflict, no window about conflicting trails is displayed. After you click Next, theU2000 displays the window about discrete services.

6. Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.7. After the search is complete, click Finish.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 107: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.2. Set the level, rate and direction of the service.

Set the service level as GE, and set the service direction as Unidirectional.3. Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog

box, select the NE, card, and port.

Set the source port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE331.

Set the sink port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE333.4. Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route. Right-click the NE

that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu. In theupper left corner of the NE icon, is displayed. Right-click the NE that selectively receivesservices and choose Set Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu. In the upperleft corner of the NE icon, is displayed.

Set optical NE A as the dual transmitting node and optical NE C as the receiving node.5. Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.6. Select the Activate check box.7. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

----End

2.1.13 Sample Application: Configuring an OCh TrailThis section describes how to configure an OCh trail in the end-to-end mode.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The optical NE as shown in Figure 2-21 must be created.l The NEs and boards as shown in NE Panel must be created.

ContextProject network design

Project T is a ring network that consists of stations A, B, C, and D. The network uses the OptiXMetro 6100 equipment. Stations A, B, C, and D are optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)stations. Each station has only one NE. Figure 2-21 shows the network design, and Table 2-3lists the network configuration data.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-71

Page 108: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-21 Network design

OADM

D

A

B

C

Table 2-3 Network data table

Station NE Type NE Name IP Address Remarks

A OADM NE403 129.9.1.174 Gateway NE

B OADM NE430 129.9.1.145 Non-gatewayNE

C OADM NE401 129.9.1.146 Non-gatewayNE

D OADM NE402 129.9.1.147 Non-gatewayNE

NE Panel

In the project, the configurations for NEs on stations A, B, C, and D are the same.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 109: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-22 NE panel on station A

L4G

SC2

SCC

FIU

PMU

FIU

WSD9

WSM9

L4G

Service demand

A main responsibility of the transmission equipment maintenance engineers in the transmissionmaintenance department of the network management center is to provision and groom servicesin the WDM network. An engineer receives a grooming order for provisioning two services.One is a unidirectional service from station B to station C. The other is a bidirectional servicefrom station B to station D. Based on the services, the planned OCh trails are as follows:

l There is a unidirectional trail from station B to station C. The route is B->C. The wavelengthof the service is wavelength 1. Figure 2-23 shows the trail signal flow.

Figure 2-23 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station C

l There is a bidirectional trail from station B to station D. The route from station B to stationD is B->C->D. This route passes through station C. The wavelength of the service iswavelength 2. The route from station D to station B is D->A->B. This route passes throughstation A. The wavelength of the service is wavelength 2. Figure 2-24 and Figure 2-25show the trail signal flows.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-73

Page 110: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-24 Signal flow of the trail from station B to station D

Figure 2-25 Signal flow of the trail from station D to station B

Configuration procedure

1. Search for WDM server trails.2. Create an OCh trail from station B to station C.3. Create an OCh trail between station B and station D.

Procedure

Step 1 Search for WDM server trails.

1. Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking and signal flow diagrams.

2. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

3. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 111: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

4. Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

5. Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTEIf no conflict trail exists, the window of conflict trails is not displayed. Click Next. The U2000displays a window that displays discrete services.

6. Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.7. After the search is complete, click Finish.

Step 2 Create an OCh trail from station B to station C.1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.2. Set the level and direction of the service.

Set the service level to OCh, and set the service direction to Unidirectional.3. Click Browse and the Select Board Port-Source/Sink dialog box is displayed. Select the

NE, board, port and wavelength.

Set the source port to port 1 of the L4G in slot 1 on NE430 and the sink port to port 1 ofthe L4G in slot 1 on NE401.

4. Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.5. Select the Activate check box.6. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

Step 3 Create an OCh trail between station B and station D.1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.2. Set the level, rate and direction of the service.

Set the service level to OCh, and set the service direction to Bidirectional.3. Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog

box, select the NE, card, and port.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-75

Page 112: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Set the source port to port 1 of the L4G in slot 2 on NE430 and the sink port to port 1 ofthe L4G in slot 2 on NE402.

4. Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.5. Select the Activate check box.6. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

----End

2.1.14 Application Example: Configuring an OCh Trail with OLPProtection by Using the End-To-End Trail Management Function(OptiX OSN 6800)

This topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on theOptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.14.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on theOptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a link network.

2.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an OCh trail and how to plan parametersfor the trail.

2.1.14.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an OCh trail with the OLP protection.

2.1.14.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an OCh trail with the optical line protection (OLP) on theOptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a link network.

Service RequirementsFigure 2-26 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. EachNE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:

User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional OCh trail with the OLP protection existsbetween NE1 and NE2.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 113: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-26 Configuration networking diagram of an OCh trail

Card ConfigurationIn this example, one NS2 card and one OLP card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-27 Card configuration

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-77

Page 114: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an OCh trail and how to plan parametersfor the trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional OCh trail with optical line protection (OLP) exists between NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-28 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE2. Figure 2-29 shows the intra-stationsignal flow of NE1 and NE4.

Figure 2-28 Signal flow of an OCh trail

Figure 2-29 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 115: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Parameter PlanningOMS server trails need to be created before you create an OCh trail. Therefore, search for trailsbefore creating an OCh trail to ensure that the required OMS server trails exist.

NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-4 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

2.1.14.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an OCh trail with the OLP protection.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Search for WDM trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.

NOTEAfter the search, you will find that an OMS trail exists between the source and sink NEs where the OChtrail is created. If not, the OCh trail cannot be created.

Step 2 Create the OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-79

Page 116: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched outdirectly after a trail search.

l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can beused for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails afterthe OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-5 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.15 Application Example: Configuring an ODUk Trail by Usingthe Cross-Layer Creation Function (OptiX OSN 6800)

This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.15.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a ring network.

2.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an ODUk trail and how to planparameters for the trail.

2.1.15.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an ODU1 trails with the SNCP protection.

2.1.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This topic describes how to configure an ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection(SNCP) on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configuration example adopts a ring network.

Service Requirements

Figure 2-30 shows a ring network that consists of four optical NEs, that is, NE1, NE2, NE3,and NE4. Each NE is an OADM station. The service requirements are as follows:

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 117: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional ODUk trail with the SNCP protectionexists between NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-30 Configuration networking diagram of an ODUk trail

Card ConfigurationIn this example, two NS2 cards and one TDG card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-81

Page 118: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-31 Card configuration

2.1.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the signal flow of an ODUk trail and how to planparameters for the trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional ODUk trail with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists betweenNE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

Figure 2-32 shows the signal flow from NE1 to NE4. Figure 2-33 shows the intra-station signalflow of NE1 and NE4.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 119: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-32 Signal flow of an ODUk trail

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-83

Page 120: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-33 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

Figure 2-34 Intra-station signal flow of NE2 and NE3

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 121: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Parameter PlanningServer trails need to be created before you create an ODU1 trail. In the network provided in theexample, the server trails include OMS, OCh, ODUk, and OTUk trails. Among them, the OMStrail can be searched out directly and need not be created manually. Since the U2000 supportsthe cross-layer creation of trails, an ODU1 trail can be created on an OCh trail directly. Therefore,you need to create an OCh trail before creating an ODU1 trail.

Since the ODU1 trail is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and aprotection route exist for the trail. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the ODU1 trail, youneed to create server trails for its working route and protection route, that is, OCh-trail-1 andOCh-trail-2.

NOTE

The ODU1 service has the working route, NE1->NE4, and the protection route, NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

l The working route traverses the OCh trail OCh-trail-1.

l The protection route traverses the OCh trail OCh-trail-2.

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-6 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-16-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-16-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-85

Page 122: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-7 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorkingRoute

ServerLink fortheProtection Route

ODU1-trail

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-1-TDG-201(LP)-1

NE4-shelf0-1-TDG-201(LP)-1

NE1, NE4 OCh-trail-1

OCh-trail-2

2.1.15.3 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trails with the SNCP protection.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Search for OMS trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails.

Step 2 Create two bidirectional OCh trails. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched outdirectly after a trail search.

l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can beused for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails afterthe OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-8 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-16-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf0-16-NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Step 3 Create a bidirectional ODU1 trail. For details, see 2.1.4.2 Creating an ODUk Trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 123: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-9 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorkingRoute

ServerLink fortheProtection Route

ODU1-trail

Bidirectional

NE1-shelf0-1-TDG-201(LP)-1

NE4-shelf0-1-TDG-201(LP)-1

NE1, NE4 OCh-trail-1

OCh-trail-2

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.16 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on theOptiX BWS 1600G by Using a traditional method

This sample describes how to configure GE Services with the WXCP protection in the end-to-end mode.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The Optical NE must be created as shown in Figure 2-35.l The NEs and boards must be created as shown in NE Panel.

ContextNetwork Design

The Project T constructs a ring network with station A, station B, station C and station D. Allthe equipments are OptiX Metro 6100V1E. Station A is an Optical Terminal Multiplexer (OTM)station. The station A has two back-to-back OTMs including two NEs. Station B, station C andstation D are Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM) stations. Each station has one NEs. Thenetwork design is shown in Figure 2-35.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-87

Page 124: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-35 Network Design

OADM

D

A

B

C

OTM

Slot Diagram

Figure 2-36 Station A

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 125: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-37 Station B

Figure 2-38 Station C

Figure 2-39 Station D

Service Requirements

In the network management center, the maintenance engineer is responsible for the servicedeployment and adjustment. Suppose that the engineer is familiar with all the services carriedby the WDM network. One of the routine tasks of this engineer is to deploy the GE level serviceto a wavelength. After receiving a request, the engineer must follow the request to configure aGE level service with WXCP from station A to station C.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-89

Page 126: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

1. Query the available resources of the WDM side.2. Search for WDM trails.3. Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.

Procedure

Step 1 Query the available resources of the WDM side.1. Choose Inventory > WDM Statistic Report > Statistics Report of WDM Client-Side

Port Resources from the Main Menu.2. Select the optical NE A and the optical NE C from the Navigation Tree. Click the double

arrow button to add the port resources of the two NEs to the statistics area at the right-handside.

3. Click Used Port and Unused Port to view the using status of each port.4. Record all the available resources.

Step 2 Search for WDM trails.1. Connect fibers on the U2000 according to the actual networking diagram.2. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.3. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

4. Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

5. Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTEIf no trails conflict, no window about conflicting trails is displayed. After you click Next, theU2000 displays the window about discrete services.

6. Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.7. After the search is complete, click Finish.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 127: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 Create a GE trail with the WXCP protection.

1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

2. Set the level, rate and direction of the service.

Set the service level as GE, and set the service direction as Unidirectional.

3. Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialogbox, select the NE, card, and port.

Set the source port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE331.

Set the sink port as No.3 port of the No.1 timeslot LQG on NE333.

4. Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route. Right-click the NEthat dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut menu. In theupper left corner of the NE icon, is displayed. Right-click the NE that selectively receivesservices and choose Set Selective-Receiving Point from the shortcut menu. In the upperleft corner of the NE icon, is displayed.

Set optical NE A as the dual transmitting node and optical NE C as the receiving node.

5. Click the General Attributes, set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.

6. Select the Activate check box.

7. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

----End

2.1.17 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on theOptiX OSN 6800 by Using a traditional method

This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service with the SNCP protection.

2.1.17.1 Networking ConfigurationThis configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service on a ring network.

2.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

2.1.17.3 Configuration ProcessThis configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protectionwith the traditional method. In addition, the example provides details about the process forconfiguring a GE service. Specifically, you need to configure the server trails of a GE servicelayer by layer before creating the GE service.

2.1.17.1 Networking Configuration

This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service on a ring network.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-91

Page 128: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Service Requirements

As shown in Figure 2-40, four optical NEs, which are NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4, consist of aring network. Each site is an OADM site. In this case, the service requirements are as follows:

To enable communication between User 1 and User 2, a bidirectional GE service with the SNCPprotection is required between NE1 and NE4.

Figure 2-40 Networking configuration for a GE service

Card Configuration

In this example, one 52TOM card and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE1 and NE4and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE2 and NE3.

Figure 2-41 Card configuration

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 129: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.17.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional GE service with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists betweenNE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

Figure 2-42 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE4. Figure 2-43 shows the intra-stationsignal flow of NE1 and NE4.

Figure 2-42 GE service signal flow

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-93

Page 130: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-43 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

Parameter Planning

If you create a GE service with the traditional method, you also need to create the server trailsfor the service. In the network provided in the example, the server trails include OMS, OCh,ODU2, and ODU1 trails. Among them, the OMS trails can be searched out directly and neednot be created manually. After you create an OCh trail, you can search out the OTUk trail bythe trail search.

Since the GE service is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and a protectionroute exist for the service. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the GE service, you also needto create server trails for the working route and protection route. In the tables below, trail-1represents the server trail of the working route and trail-2, trail-3, trail-4 represents the servertrail of the protection route.

NOTEThe GE service has both the working route that is NE1->NE4 and the protection route that is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

l The working route traverses the following OCh trail: OCh-trail-1.

l The protection route traverses the following OCh trails: OCh-trail-2 (that is, NE1->NE2), OCh-trail-3(that is, NE2->NE3), and OCh-trail-4 (that is, NE3->NE4).

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-94 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 131: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-10 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-3 Bidirectional NE2-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE3-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-4 Bidirectional NE3-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Table 2-11 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU2-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-1

ODU2-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-2,OCh-trail-3,OCh-trail-4

Table 2-12 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-201(ClientLP1)-1

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-201(ClientLP1)-1

ODU2-trail-1

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-95

Page 132: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-203(ClientLP3)-1

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-203(ClientLP3)-1

ODU2-trail-2

Table 2-13 Parameter planning for a GE service

Name Level Direction

SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

SinkNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorking Route

ServerLink fortheProtectionRoute

GE-trail-1

Client Bidirectional

NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE1,NE4

ODU1-trail-1

ODU1-trail-2

2.1.17.3 Configuration ProcessThis configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protectionwith the traditional method. In addition, the example provides details about the process forconfiguring a GE service. Specifically, you need to configure the server trails of a GE servicelayer by layer before creating the GE service.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

ContextNOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to twelve scenarios. In this application, Non-Cascading ODU1tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) mode is used. For information on other scenarios, navigatethrough topics 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.

l The total speed of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l For a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports can support one signal at most.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-96 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 133: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In this application, the client-side logical ports inside the 52TOM card is divided into four groups:ClientLP1 and ClientLP2, ClientLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, together withClientLP7 and ClientLP8. Ports in the same group cannot be used at the same time. For example, ifyou configure a cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, you cannot configureanother cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. The same restriction appliesto ports of other groups.

l The total speed of services at eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot be higher than 10 Gbit/s.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added ordropped.

Type Name Working Mode ConfigurationMethod

Card 52TOM Non-Cascading For details, see2.6.1.3 Configuringthe Working Modeof the 52TOMBoard.

Port ClientLP1,ClientLP3

ODU1 tributarymode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM interface on the 52TOM card.

Card-Optical Port-Channel

Service Type Service Mode ConfigurationMethod

52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

- Client mode For details, see 2.6.2Configuring theService Mode.

52TOM-201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

GE - For details, see 2.6.4Configuring theService Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDMTrails.

Step 4 Create four bidirectional OCh trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.1 Creating anOCh Trail.

NOTEIn the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections,you need not create such an OCh manually.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-97

Page 134: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-14 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-3 Bidirectional NE2-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE3-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-4 Bidirectional NE3-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Step 5 Search for OTUk trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDMTrails.

Step 6 Create two bidirectional ODU2 trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.2 Creating anODUk Trail.

Table 2-15 Parameter planning for an ODU2 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU2-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-1

ODU2-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-51(ODU1LP)-1

OCh-trail-2,OCh-trail-3,OCh-trail-4,

Step 7 Create two bidirectional ODU1 trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.2 Creating anODUk Trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-98 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 135: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-16 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Card-Slot-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU1-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-201(ClientLP1)-1

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-201(ClientLP1)-1

ODU2-trail-1

ODU1-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-203(ClientLP3)-1

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-203(ClientLP3)-1

ODU2-trail-2

Step 8 Create a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP protection. For details about the operation, see2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.

Table 2-17 Parameter planning for a GE service

Name Level Direction

SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

SinkNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorking Route

ServerLink fortheProtectionRoute

GE-trail-1

Client Bidirectional

NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE1,NE4

ODU1-trail-1

ODU1-trail-2

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.18 Configuration Example: Configuring GE Services on theOptiX OSN 6800 with the Cross-Layer Trail Creation Method

This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service with the SNCP protection.

2.1.18.1 Networking ConfigurationThis configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service on a ring network.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-99

Page 136: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

2.1.18.3 Configuration ProcessThis configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protectionwith the cross-layer creation method. In addition, the example provides details about the processfor configuring a GE service. Specifically, a GE service is created directly on an OCh link.

2.1.18.1 Networking Configuration

This configuration example is based on the OptiX OSN 6800. It illustrates how to configure aGE service on a ring network.

Service Requirements

As shown in Figure 2-44, four optical NEs, which are NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4, consist of aring network. Each site is an OADM site. In this case, the service requirements are as follows:

To enable communication between User 1 and User 2, a bidirectional GE service with the SNCPprotection is required between NE1 and NE4.

Figure 2-44 Networking configuration for a GE service

Card Configuration

In this example, one 52TOM card and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE1 and NE4and two 52NS2 cards are configured on both NE2 and NE3.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-100 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 137: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-45 Card configuration

2.1.18.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the GE service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional GE service with the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) exists betweenNE1 and NE4. The working route is NE1->NE4 and the protection route is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

Figure 2-46 shows the signal flow between NE1 and NE4. Figure 2-47 shows the intra-stationsignal flow of NE1 and NE4.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-101

Page 138: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-46 GE service signal flow

Figure 2-47 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE4

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-102 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 139: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Parameter Planning

If you create a GE service with the cross-layer creation method, you can create the servicedirectly on an OCh link because the ODU2 and ODU1 server trails are generated automaticallyduring the creation of the GE service. In the network provided in the example, the server trailsinclude OTS, OMS, OCh, ODU2, and ODU1 trails. Among them, the OTS and OMS trails canbe searched out directly and need not be created manually. Hence, you only need to create anOCh trail and the GE service.

Since the GE service is a dual fed and selective receiving service, a working route and a protectionroute exist for the service. Therefore, in addition to the creation of the GE service, you also needto create server trails for the working route and protection route. In the tables below, trail-1represents the server trail of the working route and trail-2, trail-3, trail-4 represents the servertrail of the protection route.

NOTEThe GE service has both the working route that is NE1->NE4 and the protection route that is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE4.

l The working route traverses the following OCh trail: OCh-trail-1.

l The protection route traverses the following OCh trails: OCh-trail-2 (that is, NE1->NE2), OCh-trail-3(that is, NE2->NE3), and OCh-trail-4 (that is, NE3->NE4).

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-18 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-3 Bidirectional NE2-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE3-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-4 Bidirectional NE3-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-103

Page 140: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-19 Parameter planning for a GE service

Name Level Direction

SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

SinkNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorking Route

ServerLink fortheProtectionRoute

GE-trail-1

Client Bidirectional

NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE1,NE4

OCh-trail-1

OCh-trail-2,OCh-trail-3,OCh-trail-4

2.1.18.3 Configuration ProcessThis configuration example illustrates how to configure a GE service with the SNCP protectionwith the cross-layer creation method. In addition, the example provides details about the processfor configuring a GE service. Specifically, a GE service is created directly on an OCh link.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

ContextNOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to twelve scenarios. In this application, Non-Cascading ODU1tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) mode is used. For information on other scenarios, navigatethrough topics 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.

l The total speed of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l For a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports can support one signal at most.

NOTE

l In this application, the client-side logical ports inside the 52TOM card is divided into four groups:ClientLP1 and ClientLP2, ClientLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, together withClientLP7 and ClientLP8. Ports in the same group cannot be used at the same time. For example, ifyou configure a cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, you cannot configureanother cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. The same restriction appliesto ports of other groups.

l The total speed of services at eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot be higher than 10 Gbit/s.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added ordropped.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-104 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 141: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Type Name Working Mode ConfigurationMethod

Card 52TOM Non-Cascading For details, see2.6.1.3 Configuringthe Working Modeof the 52TOMBoard.

Port ClientLP1,ClientLP3

ODU1 tributarymode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM interface on the 52TOM card.

Card-Optical Port-Channel

Service Type Service Mode ConfigurationMethod

52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

- Client mode For details, see 2.6.2Configuring theService Mode.

52TOM-201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

GE - For details, see 2.6.4Configuring theService Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDMTrails.

Step 4 Create four bidirectional OCh trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.4.1 Creating anOCh Trail.

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched outdirectly after a trail search.

l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can beused for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails afterthe OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-20 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-2 Bidirectional NE1-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-105

Page 142: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail-3 Bidirectional NE2-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE3-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

OCh-trail-4 Bidirectional NE3-shelf3-11-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

NE4-shelf3-5-52NS2-(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Step 5 Create a bidirectional GE service with the SNCP protection. For details about the operation, see2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.

Table 2-21 Parameter planning for a GE service

Name Level Direction

SourceNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

SinkNE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

DualFed/SelectiveReceiving NE

ServerLink fortheWorking Route

ServerLink fortheProtectionRoute

GE-trail-1

Client Bidirectional

NE1-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE4-shelf3-1-52TOM-3(RX/TX)

NE1,NE4

OCh-trail-1

OCh-trail-2,OCh-trail-3,OCh-trail-4

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.19 Application Example: Configuring an ODU1 Trail by Usingthe Cross-Layer Creation Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary-LineMode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))

This topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.1.19.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configurationexample adopts a link network.

2.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the ODU1 service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-106 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 143: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.1.19.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. The ODU1 trail doesnot need to be created. You can search for ODU1 trails after configuring OTU1 cross-connections in the NE Explorer.

2.1.19.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. This configurationexample adopts a link network.

Service RequirementsFigure 2-48 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. EachNE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:

User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional ODU1 service exists between NE1 andNE2.

Figure 2-48 Configuration networking diagram of an ODU1 trail

Card ConfigurationIn this example, one 52TOM card is configured on both NE1 and NE2.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-107

Page 144: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-49 Card configuration

2.1.19.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the ODU1 service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional ODU1 service exists between NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-50 shows the service flow from NE1 to NE2. Figure 2-51 shows the intra-station signalflow of NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-50 ODU1 service signal flow

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-108 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 145: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-51 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

Parameter PlanningServer trails need to be created before you create an ODU1 trail. In the network provided in theexample, the server trails include OMS, OCh, and OTU1 trails. The OMS trail can be searchedout directly and need not be created manually. Therefore, you only need to create an OCh trail(OCh-trail) before creating an ODU1 trail.

NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Set the 52TOM card to the cascading mode and its port to the working mode of ODU0 tributary-line (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). You need to set 10(RX8/TX8) as a line-side port. In thismode, you cannot search for OTU1 trails. You can search for an ODU1 trail only afterconfiguring the OTU1 cross-connections in the NE Explorer.

NOTEIn this scenario, port 10(RX8/TX8) is available only after its service mode is set to OTN Mode and itsport type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-109

Page 146: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Table 2-22 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)

2\1529.55\196.000

Table 2-23 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections

Level Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

OTU1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1

OTU1 Bidirectional NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1

Table 2-24 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU1-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-161(ODU0LP1)-1

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-161(ODU0LP1)-1

OCh-trail

2.1.19.3 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to create an ODU1 trail on the OptiX OSN 6800. The ODU1 trail doesnot need to be created. You can search for ODU1 trails after configuring OTU1 cross-connections in the NE Explorer.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-110 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 147: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ContextNOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to 12 scenarios. In this scenario, Cascading ODU0 tributary mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode is used. For information about other scenarios, navigatethrough 2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board.

l The ClientLP1 port and ClientLP2 port share a channel, but this channel cannot be used by both portsat the same time. Therefore, if the 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service cannot be configured.

l The total rates of incoming services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

l In the case of a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports supports only one input signal.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE4 where GE services are added ordropped.

Type Name Working Mode ConfigurationMethod

Card 52TOM Cascading For details, see2.6.1.3 Configuringthe Working Modeof the 52TOMBoard.

Port ClientLP1 ODU0 tributarymode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)

Step 2 Set the service mode of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.

Card-Optical Port-Channel

Service Mode Configuration Method

52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1 OTN Mode For details, see 2.6.2Configuring the ServiceMode.

Step 3 Set the port type of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.

Card-Optical Port Type Configuration Method

52TOM-10(RX8/TX8) Line Side Color Optical Port You need to delete this portfirst. Then, add the port againand modify the port type. Fordetails, see 2.6.5 ModifyingPort.

Step 4 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDMTrails.

Step 5 Create a bidirectional OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-111

Page 148: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched outdirectly after a trail search.

l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can beused for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails afterthe OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-25 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)

2\1529.55\196.000

Step 6 Create two OTU1 cross-connections. For details, see 2.6.6 Creating Cross-Connections.

Table 2-26 Parameter planning for OTU1 cross-connections

Level Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

OTU1 Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1

OTU1 Bidirectional NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-10(RX8/TX8)-1

Step 7 Search for ODU1 trails. For details, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDM Trails. After the search,the ODU1 trail is displayed in the WDM Trail Management window.

Table 2-27 Parameter planning for an ODU1 trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Server Link

ODU1-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52TOM-161(ODU0LP1)-1

NE2-shelf0-2-52TOM-161(ODU0LP1)-1

OCh-trail

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-112 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 149: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTEWhen creating trails by using the trail search function, name the new trails according to the custom namingrules for WDM trails.

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.1.20 Application Example: Configuring an Any Service by Usingthe Cross-Layer Creation Function (52TOM, ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))

This topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

2.1.20.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series. Thisconfiguration example adopts a link network.

2.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the Any service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

2.1.20.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

2.1.20.1 Configuration Networking DiagramThis topic describes how to configure an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series. Thisconfiguration example adopts a link network.

Service RequirementsFigure 2-52 shows a link network that consists of two optical NEs, that is, NE1 and NE2. EachNE is an OTM station. The service requirements are as follows:

User 1 can communicate with User 2 and a bidirectional Any service exists between NE1 andNE2.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-113

Page 150: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-52 Configuration networking diagram of an Any service

Card ConfigurationIn this example, one 52TOM card and one 52NS2 card are configured on both NE1 and NE2.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-114 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 151: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-53 Card configuration

2.1.20.2 Service Signal Flow and Parameter PlanningThis topic describes how to configure the Any service signal flow and how to plan parametersfor each trail.

Service Signal FlowA bidirectional Any service exists between NE1 and NE2.

Figure 2-54 shows the service flow from NE1 to NE2. Figure 2-55 shows the intra-station signalflow of NE1 and NE2.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-115

Page 152: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-54 Any service signal flow

Figure 2-55 Intra-station signal flow of NE1 and NE2

Parameter PlanningServer trails need to be created before you create an Any service. In the network provided in theexample, the server trails include OMS, OCh, OTUk, and ODUk trails. Among them, the OMStrail can be searched out directly and need not be created manually. Since the U2000 supportsthe cross-layer creation of trails, the Any service can be created on an OCh trail directly.Therefore, you only need to create an OCh trail (OCh-trail) before creating an Any service.

Set the 52TOM card to cascading mode and its port to the working mode of ODU0 tributary(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-116 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 153: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

When creating OCh trails, ensure that the wavelength of an OTU card matches the wavelength of aconnected multiplexer or demultiplexer card.

l In the case of a static multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as M40 and MR2, the wavelength ofthe OTU card must be the same as the wavelength of the port on the multiplexer or demultiplexercard that is connected to the OTU card.

l In the case of a dynamic multiplexer or demultiplexer card, such as WMS9 and RMU9, thewavelength of the OTU card must match the band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer card that isconnected to the OTU card.

l In the preceding example, cards WSM9 and WSD9 belong to even bands. Therefore, you need toselect even wavelengths for the wavelength of the NE2 card.

Table 2-28 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52NS2-1(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf0-2-52NS2-1(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Table 2-29 Parameter planning for the Any service

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Server Link

Any-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-1-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)

NE2-shelf0-1-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)

OCh-trail

2.1.20.3 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes how to create an Any service on the OptiX OSN 8800 series.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-117

Page 154: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ContextNOTE

l The 52TOM card can be applied to 12 scenarios. In this application, Cascading ODU0 tributary mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode is used. For information about other scenarios, navigate through 2.6.1Configuring the Working Mode of the Board in the Help.

l In the case of a port in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) on a cascading card, OptiXOSN 8800 I and OptiX OSN 8800 II do not support the grooming of ODU1 trails.

l In the case of a port in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) on a cascading card, OptiXOSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 do not support the grooming of ODU0 trails.

l Each optical port supports a client-side signal at the maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. The total rate ofclient-side incoming services at the eight pairs of optical ports cannot be higher than 2.5 Gbit/s.

l The total rate of services at each group of ClientLP ports cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. In the caseof a GE service, each group of ClientLP ports supports only one input signal.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the working mode of the 52TOM cards on NE1 and NE2 where the Any service is added ordropped.

Type Name Working Mode ConfigurationMethod

Card 52TOM Cascading For details, see2.6.1.3 Configuringthe Working Modeof the 52TOMBoard.

Port ClientLP1 ODU0 tributarymode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])

Step 2 Set the service type and service mode of the WDM port on the 52TOM cards.

Card-Optical Port-Channel

Service Type Service Mode ConfigurationMethod

52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)-1

- Client mode For details, see 2.6.2Configuring theService Mode.

52TOM-201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

Any - For details, see 2.6.4Configuring theService Type.

Step 3 Search for OMS trails. For details about the operation, see 2.1.3.1 Searching for WDMTrails.

Step 4 Create a bidirectional OCh trail. For details, see 2.1.4.1 Creating an OCh Trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-118 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 155: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In the case of an OCh trail without dynamic cross-connections, that is, with pure static cross-connections, you need not create such an OCh trail manually. Such an OCh trail can be searched outdirectly after a trail search.

l If the source card and sink card of the OCh trail are cards such as L2DGD and L2QMD that can beused for intra-card 1+1 protection, you must perform the trail search to search for OTUk trails afterthe OCh trail is created. Otherwise, the cross-layer creation of a Client trail is affected. Specifically,the created Client trail is inconsistent with the Client trail searched out after the trail search.

Table 2-30 Parameter planning for an OCh trail

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port

Wavelength

OCh-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-2-52NS2-1(IN/OUT)

NE2-shelf0-2-52NS2-1(IN/OUT)

2\1529.55\196.000

Step 5 Create an Any service. For details, see 2.1.4.3 Creating Client Trails.

Table 2-31 Parameter planning for the Any service

Name Direction Source NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Sink NE-Shelf-Slot-Card-Port-Channel

Server Link

Any-trail Bidirectional NE1-shelf0-1-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)

NE2-shelf0-1-52TOM-3(RX1/TX1)

OCh-trail

----End

ResultIf you select Bidirectional when creating a trail, one unidirectional trail group is displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window after the creation.

2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionThe optical layer multipath protection can fully utilize the existing idle line resources of thenetwork. Through the optical cross-connections of the WSS boards, this protection offersautomatic and flexible selection of the protection paths in the protection switching.

2.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection AutomaticallyThis topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protectionautomatically, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modifyparameters.

2.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection Manually

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-119

Page 156: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protectionmanually, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify parameters.

2.2.1 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionAutomatically

This topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protectionautomatically, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modifyparameters.

2.2.1.1 Configuration PrincipleWhen configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the followingprinciples to configure the protection properly.

2.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NEBefore configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS functionon NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information aboutthe topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cutoccurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layermultipath protection.

2.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NEYou need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working paththat carries services passes the WSS boards.

2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM TrailsAfter you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be foundat the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need toestablish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for thecross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

2.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection AutomaticallyBy using the function of creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trailautomatically, the users need not learn the detailed route information about this protection. TheU2000 creates the optical cross-connections for the protection automatically in the WSS boardsaccording to the utilization of resources networkwide. Creating the optical layer multipathprotection automatically can simplify the configuration procedure and avoid incorrectoperations.

2.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionFor the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path andmodify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

2.2.1.1 Configuration Principle

When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the followingprinciples to configure the protection properly.

The common principles for the configuration of the optical layer multipath protection are asfollows:

l Plan the wavelengths networkwide. Configure a unique wavelength for each service toprevent wavelength conflict in switching.

l Reserve wavelength resources for the protection when you plan the network.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-120 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 157: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l The WSD+WSM networking is recommended, so that no wavelength conflict occurs inservices.

l The protection cannot be configured for the FOADM station and ROADM station of theDWC network.

l Configure the logical fiber connections that are consistent with the actual networking onthe U2000.

l When a fiber cut occurs in the working path, NEs find a protection path through rerouting.Meanwhile, the U2000 switches the services to the protection path. If a fiber cut occurs inthe protection path and the working path remains faulty, NEs will find another protectionpath through rerouting again.

l Create an OCh trail as the working path before creating the optical layer multipathprotection. It is recommended that you create the optical cross-connections on a per-NEbasis and form an OCh trail through the search function. If you create the optical cross-connections by trail, you need to plan the network first to ensure that the created trail passesthe WSS boards.

l You need not create the protection cross-connections within the WSS boards. The cross-connections of the route can be viewed on NEs only when the protection switching(rerouting) occurs.

2.2.1.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE

Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS functionon NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information aboutthe topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cutoccurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layermultipath protection.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background InformationNOTE

In a network with the optical layer multipath protection, you can enable the WSS functions for a maximum of50 NEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Enable WSS from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the configured WSS from an NE.

Step 3 In the Enable WSS drop-down list, set the parameters on the U2000.

Step 4 Click Apply to issue the configuration.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-121

Page 158: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

----End

2.2.1.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NEYou need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working paththat carries services passes the WSS boards.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The external and internal fiber connections of NEs must be established and the boundary portsmust be configured.

It must be applicable to the WSS boards.

Background InformationWhen configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to adjust the optical powerattenuations of all stations on the working path by using the OptiX MDS 5600, so as to deliverbest-quality services. In the optical layer multipath protection, when a switching occurs, theconfigurations for all boards on the working path are unchanged. Therefore, when the servicesare switched back to the working path, the services can reach the best-quality state quickly.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-122 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 159: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, SourceBand, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.

NOTE

The Cross-Connec Type should be set to Common Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.2.1.4 Searching for WDM Trails

After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be foundat the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need toestablish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for thecross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment, and the logical fiberconnections that correspond to the physical fiber connections must be configured on theU2000.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-123

Page 160: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from thenetworking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the areathat beyond the selected subnet range.

l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out becausethey are not filtered out during verification.

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to endtrails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.

l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may causeinterruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.

----End

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-124 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 161: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.2.1.5 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection AutomaticallyBy using the function of creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trailautomatically, the users need not learn the detailed route information about this protection. TheU2000 creates the optical cross-connections for the protection automatically in the WSS boardsaccording to the utilization of resources networkwide. Creating the optical layer multipathprotection automatically can simplify the configuration procedure and avoid incorrectoperations.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

At least one single-sourced and single-sinked OCh trail must be created and activated forcarrying services.

The optical layer multipath protection must be enabled.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.

l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing theexisting trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, right-click, and then choose Set WSS Protection Automatically from theshortcut menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-125

Page 162: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating the operation is successful. ClickClose.

NOTE

l After you successfully configure the optical layer multipath protection, the working path is equippedwith the optical layer multipath protection. The protection path, however, is not displayed in the WDMTrail Management window at the moment.

l When a switching occurs in the optical layer multipath protection that is created automatically, theU2000 reports an abnormal event, informing the user of the switching of services. After you search forthe trails, the trail information is refreshed and the working path and protection path are displayed inthe WDM Trail Management window.

Step 5 Optional: To clear the optical layer multipath protection that is previously configured, selectan OCh trail with the protection, right-click, and then choose Clear WSS Protection from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

l When changing the wavelengths of the OTUs, you need to delete the optical layer multipath protectionfirst. After setting the wavelengths of the OTUs, configure the optical layer multipath protection again.

l If the protection is deleted when the services are running in the protection path, the services are switchedback to the working path automatically after the deletion, even when the working path is faulty.

----End

2.2.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionFor the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path andmodify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-126 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 163: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The optical layer multipath protection must be created.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the

existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select a trail of the optical layer multipath protection and choose Maintenance > WSSProtection Management. The WSS Protection Management window is displayed.

Step 4 Optional: In the WSS Protection Management window, click Query to query the SwitchingStatus and the Current Status of trails.

NOTE

When opening the WSS Protection Management window, you can query only the parameters of theprotection group on the U2000. You cannot query the Switching Status and the Current Status of trailsbecause they are not updated. The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection onNEs only when you click Query. Otherwise, the status information about the protection is not updated onthe U2000.

Step 5 In the WSS Protection Management dialog box, set the Revertive mode and WTR Time(s).

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-127

Page 164: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l The WTR Time(s) can be set only when the Revertive mode is set to Revertive.

l The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on NEs only when you clickQuery.

Step 6 Click Apply to apply the settings to NEs.

Step 7 Optional: Click Function, you can select Lockout, Force to Protection, or Clear.

NOTE

The options Lockout and Force to Protection can be selected only when the optical layer multipathprotection is configured manually.

----End

2.2.2 Configuring Optical Layer Multipath Protection ManuallyThis topic describes the procedures for configuring the optical layer multipath protectionmanually, including information on how to create, delete the protection and modify parameters.

2.2.2.1 Configuration PrincipleWhen configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the followingprinciples to configure the protection properly.

2.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NEBefore configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS functionon NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information aboutthe topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cutoccurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layermultipath protection.

2.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NEYou need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working paththat carries services passes the WSS boards.

2.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEsBefore creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create protectioncross-connections for the WSS boards at the source and sink ends of the working path.

2.2.2.5 Searching for WDM TrailsAfter you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be foundat the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need toestablish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for thecross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

2.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection ManuallyBy creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail manually, you can learn thedetails about the configuration of the protection cross-connections and routes of the optical layermultipath protection.

2.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionFor the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path andmodify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-128 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 165: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.2.2.1 Configuration Principle

When configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to learn the followingprinciples to configure the protection properly.

The common principles for the configuration of the optical layer multipath protection are asfollows:l Plan the wavelengths networkwide. Configure a unique wavelength for each service to

prevent wavelength conflict in switching.l Reserve wavelength resources for the protection when you plan the network.l The WSD+WSM networking is recommended, so that no wavelength conflict occurs in

services.l The protection cannot be configured for the FOADM station and ROADM station of the

DWC network.l Configure the logical fiber connections that are consistent with the actual networking on

the U2000.l When a fiber cut occurs in the working path, NEs find a protection path through rerouting.

Meanwhile, the U2000 switches the services to the protection path. If a fiber cut occurs inthe protection path and the working path remains faulty, NEs will find another protectionpath through rerouting again.

l Create an OCh trail as the working path before creating the optical layer multipathprotection. It is recommended that you create the optical cross-connections on a per-NEbasis and form an OCh trail through the search function. If you create the optical cross-connections by trail, you need to plan the network first to ensure that the created trail passesthe WSS boards.

l You need not create the protection cross-connections within the WSS boards. The cross-connections of the route can be viewed on NEs only when the protection switching(rerouting) occurs.

2.2.2.2 Enabling the WSS Function on an NE

Before configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to enable the WSS functionon NEs that are used in this protection. In this manner, these NEs can gain information aboutthe topology networkwide through the discovery function for adjacent NEs. When a fiber cutoccurs in a path that carries services, the NEs can be on the rerouted path for the optical layermultipath protection.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background InformationNOTE

In a network with the optical layer multipath protection, you can enable the WSS functions for a maximum of50 NEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Enable WSS from the Function Tree.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-129

Page 166: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 Click Query to query the information about the configured WSS from an NE.

Step 3 In the Enable WSS drop-down list, set the parameters on the U2000.

Step 4 Click Apply to issue the configuration.

Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

----End

2.2.2.3 Creating a Working Cross-Connection for an NEYou need to create cross-connections on a per-NE basis, which ensures that the working paththat carries services passes the WSS boards.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The external and internal fiber connections of NEs must be established and the boundary portsmust be configured.

It must be applicable to the WSS boards.

Background InformationWhen configuring the optical layer multipath protection, you need to adjust the optical powerattenuations of all stations on the working path by using the OptiX MDS 5600, so as to deliverbest-quality services. In the optical layer multipath protection, when a switching occurs, theconfigurations for all boards on the working path are unchanged. Therefore, when the servicesare switched back to the working path, the services can reach the best-quality state quickly.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-130 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 167: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, SourceBand, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.

NOTE

The Cross-Connec Type should be set to Common Cross-Connection.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.2.2.4 Creating the Protection Cross-Connection on NEs

Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create protectioncross-connections for the WSS boards at the source and sink ends of the working path.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The common cross-connections for the working path must be created.

The source port and sink port of the protection cross-connection must be set as boundary ports.

Make sure that the wavelength used in the optical cross-connection for a board is not occupiedby the cross-connection on a per NE basis.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-131

Page 168: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Background Informationl Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create the

common cross-connections for services on the NEs and protection cross-connections forthe protection by using the functions at the NE layer. Later, by using the function at thenetwork layer, the information about optical cross-connections on NEs is reflected at thenetwork layer through searching. That is, the protection path is arranged by the user beforethe optical layer multipath protection is created manually.

l When you create the protection cross-connections on NEs, each common cross-connectioncan have only one corresponding protection cross-connection. That is, when you createcross-connections for the same wavelength, only a common cross-connection and aprotection cross-connection can be created as the same-source and different-sink cross-connections. The same is true for the creation of the same-sink and different-source cross-connections.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement from the Function Tree. Click the Board Optical Cross-Connection tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Optical Cross-Connection dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 According to the network plan, set the Cross-Connect Type, Source Slot, Source Port, SourceBand, Source Wavelength No., Sink Port, Activation Status.

NOTE

l The Cross-Connect Type should be set to Protection Cross-Connection.

l When you create the working path manually, select Common Cross-Connection. When you createthe protection path for the optical layer multipath protection manually, select Protection Cross-Connection. The Route Cross-Connection cannot be created manually on the U2000, Instead, theroute cross-connection is created automatically on the U2000 when a protection switching occurs. Afterthe protection switching is complete, the route cross-connection is cleared.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-132 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 169: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

2.2.2.5 Searching for WDM Trails

After you set up fiber connections on NEs, the corresponding trail information cannot be foundat the network layer on the U2000. To implement the WDM trail management, you need toestablish the end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer on the U2000 by searching for thecross-connections and fiber connections in the network.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

Fiber connections must be created correctly for the WDM equipment, and the logical fiberconnections that correspond to the physical fiber connections must be configured on theU2000.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTE

l In the mode of searching by subnet, the selected subnet range should be independent from thenetworking aspect. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the areathat beyond the selected subnet range.

l If you select Hide optional trails, the third-party wavelength services can be searched out becausethey are not filtered out during verification.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-133

Page 170: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 Click Next to begin to search for trails. The U2000 takes some time to return the results,depending on the number of services.

NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to endtrails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.

l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: The networking changes. The trail may causeinterruption of service flow. For example, the key information of the trail, including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.

Step 4 Optional: Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. Select the trail to set the trailmanagement flag.

NOTE

Skip this step if the Automatically create trails after searching policy is selected in Step 2.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services in the target network.

NOTE

If Step 4 is executed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer.This does not affect services of the actual NE or the data of an individual NE on the U2000.

Step 6 After the search is complete, click Finish.

----End

2.2.2.6 Creating Optical Layer Multipath Protection ManuallyBy creating the optical layer multipath protection for the OCh trail manually, you can learn thedetails about the configuration of the protection cross-connections and routes of the optical layermultipath protection.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

At least one single-sourced and single-sinked OCh trail must be created and activated forcarrying services.

The protection cross-connections must be created on the NEs and trail search is performed.

The optical layer multipath protection must be enabled.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Background Informationl Before creating the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to create the

protection cross-connections for the WSS boards on NEs. Later, establish a protection pathby searching the optical cross-connections on NEs. The protection path should have thesame source and sink as the working path. After that, you can set the parameters for theoptical layer multipath protection in the WDM Trail Management window.

l When configuring the optical layer multipath protection manually, you need to first set theparameters for the protection path, including the optical power attenuations for the boardson the path, optical cross-connections, and gains of the OA boards, and finishcommissioning of the OSNR. The triggered switching only switches the optical cross-connections of the WSS boards at both ends of a path to implement the service switching.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-134 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 171: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing the

existing trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select an OCh trail, right-click, and then choose Set WSS Protection Manually from theshortcut menu.

NOTE

Click Set WSS Protection Manually, the issues a command to the NE to trigger the binding between theprotection and working paths.

Step 4 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.Click Close.

NOTE

After you finishing setting the optical layer multipath protection, the working path and protection path arealways displayed in the WDM Trail Management window.

Step 5 Optional: To clear the optical layer multipath protection that is previously configured, selectan OCh trail with the protection, right-click, and then choose Clear WSS Protection from theshortcut menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-135

Page 172: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l When changing the wavelengths of the OTUs, you need to delete the optical layer multipath protectionfirst. After setting the wavelengths of the OTUs, configure the optical layer multipath protection again.

l Before deleting the protection, make sure that the services are running in the working path. If theservices are running in the protection path, the protection cannot be deleted. You need to lock theservices to the working path before deleting the protection.

----End

2.2.2.7 Modifying the Parameters of Optical Layer Multipath ProtectionFor the optical layer multipath protection that is created, you can query the working path andmodify the corresponding parameters on the U2000.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

The optical layer multipath protection must be created.

The license of the U2000 supports the WDM trail management.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter criteria and click Filter All.The trails are displayed in the list.

NOTE

l Click Filter All to display all the trails that meet the specified criteria.

l Click Secondary Filter to filter the displayed trails based on the filter criteria.

l Click Incremental Filter to add the new filter result to the end of the trail list without refreshing theexisting trail records in the list.

Step 3 Select a trail of the optical layer multipath protection and choose Maintenance > WSSProtection Management. The WSS Protection Management window is displayed.

Step 4 Optional: In the WSS Protection Management window, click Query to query the SwitchingStatus and the Current Status of trails.

NOTE

When opening the WSS Protection Management window, you can query only the parameters of theprotection group on the U2000. You cannot query the Switching Status and the Current Status of trailsbecause they are not updated. The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection onNEs only when you click Query. Otherwise, the status information about the protection is not updated onthe U2000.

Step 5 In the WSS Protection Management dialog box, set the Revertive mode and WTR Time(s).

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-136 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 173: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l The WTR Time(s) can be set only when the Revertive mode is set to Revertive.

l The U2000 queries the status of the optical layer multipath protection on NEs only when you clickQuery.

Step 6 Click Apply to apply the settings to NEs.

Step 7 Optional: Click Function, you can select Lockout, Force to Protection, or Clear.

NOTE

The options Lockout and Force to Protection can be selected only when the optical layer multipathprotection is configured manually.

----End

2.3 Configuring EAPEThe U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.By adjusting the optical power of a WDM trail, the EAPE can reduce or even eliminate bit errorsof services on the trail.

2.3.1 EAPEThe U2000 provides the enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium (EAPE) function. TheEAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channelmeets the preset requirement and that the services are available.

2.3.2 Creating an OCh TrailThe U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner in

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-137

Page 174: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

application scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you shouldcreate OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of theequipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manuallyby using the trail management function of the U2000.

2.3.3 Creating EAPE ObjectsThe U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.For a WDM service configured with the EAPE, the U2000 fine-tunes the optical power of thetransmit end according to signal quality detected by the receive end. This can improve the signalquality.

2.3.4 Querying EAPE ObjectsOn the U2000, you can query the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) objects thatare already created on the trail and enable or disable the EAPE adjustment.

2.3.5 Starting EAPE AdjustmentIn the case of a WDM service configured with EAPE, when the OTU at the sink end detects thesignal degrade, an exceptional EAPE event is reported to and displayed on the U2000. This eventprompts the user to start EAPE adjustment so that the VOA at the source end finely tunes theoptical power at the transmit end. This can enhance the signal quality.

2.3.6 Deleting EAPE ObjectsWhen the EAPE function on the trail is not required, you can manually delete the EAPE.

2.3.1 EAPEThe U2000 provides the enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium (EAPE) function. TheEAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channelmeets the preset requirement and that the services are available.

Function Description

In practice of WDM system operation, the optical power flatness of each channel, comparedwith that during deployment commissioning, greatly changes due to fiber condition variation.As a result, the quality of received signals does not meet the requirement. In this case, EAPEadjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel meetsthe preset requirement and that the services are available.

Function Implementation

The procedure to implement the EAPE function is as follows:

1. During deployment commissioning, manually adjust the optical power of each channel toobtain signal quality that meet the requirement. This ensures that each channel normallyoperates.

2. During system operation, the OTU at the receive end detects the signal quality of eachchannel.

3. When the OTU at the receive end detects an alarm, if the optical power of the OTU at thereceive end does not cross the threshold, adjust the optical power attenuation ratio of thecorresponding channel according to the actual situation. This ensures that the receive-endsignal quality of each channel meets the preset requirement and that the services areavailable.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-138 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 175: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Involved BoardsThe service board and the SCC board are jointly used to achieve the EAPE function. Thisfunction involves the following types of boards and ports:l OTU detection unit

– Detects the receive-end signal quality of each channel and reports any EAPE unbalanceevent detected.

– The boards that support this function include the OTUs and line boards with the FECfunction.

l Adjustment unit: It is the EAPE adjustment entity that adjusts the optical attenuation ofeach channel. The boards that support this function include ROAM, WSM9, WSD9,WSM5, WSD5, WSMD4, DWC, EDWC, V40, M40V, D40V, V48, VA2, VA1 and VA4.

l Received signal selection unit– The system locates the point to be adjusted according to the current protection state of

the OLP or DCP board.– The boards that support this function include the OLP and DCP.

l System control and communication unit– It is the system entity that carries out the EAPE function.– The boards that support this function include the SCC.

NOTE

For the EAPE function, EAPE protocol frames can be sent to each node as long as the physicalcommunication route is reachable. The EAPE protocol frames can be sent in modes such as the OSC andESC.

Networking ScenariosThe EAPE function can be applied in three typical scenarios.

EAPE application scenario 1 is with the basic configuration that only a trail with VOA unitexists. Figure 2-56 shows the networking diagram of this application mode. The figure illustratesonly the unidirectional EAPE pair.

Figure 2-56 Scenario of the single VOA unit that takes the common OTU as the source

EAPE application scenario 2 is applicable to the dual fed and selective receiving OTU board.Each of the two receive optical interfaces of the dual fed and selective receiving OTU has anFEC module. Two trails with VOA units exist. Hence, in this networking mode, you need toconfigure two EAPE pairs.Figure 2-57 shows the networking diagram of this application mode.The figure illustrates only the unidirectional EAPE pair.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-139

Page 176: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Figure 2-57 Scenario of the dual VOA units that take the dual-fed and selective-receiving OTUsas the sources

EAPE application scenario 3 is applicable to the 5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s OTUs. In thisnetworking mode, the intra-board 1+1 protection needs to be configured. Only one EAPE pairneeds to be configured. When the sink OTU detects an anomaly, the system locates the VOA tobe adjusted according to the current services operating channel. Figure 2-58 shows thenetworking diagram of this application mode. The figure considers the OLP board as an exampleto illustrate only the unidirectional EAPE pair.

Figure 2-58 Scenario of the dual VOA units with the OLP protection units

Configuration Principle

The EAPE configuration principles are as follows:

l When creating the EAPE, you must create the corresponding OCh trail firstly.

l Based on the basic application scenario, you just need to specify the source OTU, sink OTUand adjustment unit.

l When the OTU is jointly used with the OLP or DCP board for networking, besidesspecifying the source OTU and sink OTU, you also need to specify the OLP or DCP boardand the active and standby adjustment units. In this networking mode, the sink OLP or DCPboard and the sink OTU must be configured on one NE; the adjustment unit and the sourceOTU must be configured on another NE.

l The FEC type of the source and sink OTU must keep consistent. After EAPE is configured,the FEC working mode of the OTU must not be changed; the FEC function of the OTUmust be enabled.

l EAPE requires that the monitored path is a complete end-to-end wavelength without anyintermediate add or drop wavelength.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-140 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 177: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l An OCh trail with regenerating stations equals to two independent wavelengths and thusneed be configured with two EAPE pairs.

l EAPE requires that the adjustment unit is configured in the transmit-end station and theOTU detection unit is configured in the receive-end station.

l An OCh trail with multiple sources and sinks does not support the EAPE function.l The uploading function is not supported, but the script importing and exporting function is

supported.l If the EAPE ID on the U2000 is inconsistent with that on the NE, you need to delete the

trail on the U2000 from the network layer, search for a new trail, and then query or createEAPE objects. In this way, you can obtain the EAPE objects with consistent data betweenthe U2000 and the NE.

l The adjustment board cannot be on the sink NE, and the selective receiving board cannotbe on the source NE.

l The FEC mode of the source OTU and sink OTU should be the same.

2.3.2 Creating an OCh TrailThe U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the sourceand sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail based on the searched server trail.The WDM trail creation feature simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensuresproper operation. In addition, you can groom and deploy services in a flexible manner inapplication scenarios (deployment or expansion).Before creating an EAPE pair, you shouldcreate OCh trails. The EAPE function uses OCh trails to identify EAPE pairs. In the case of theequipment with the dynamic optical cross-connection boards, you can create OCh trails manuallyby using the trail management function of the U2000.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The OMS server trail must be searched out.

ContextThe U2000 supports the function of creating a third-party wavelength service. A third-partywavelength service is the OCh trail whose source or sink port is located on the multiplexing anddemultiplexing card or the add/drop multiplexing card, or whose source and sink ports are locatedon such cards.

The U2000 does not support the ability to reuse discrete cross-connections.

The source and sink of an OCh trail are the ports at the line side of the OTU boards. The boardsthat the trail passes should support dynamic optical cross-connection or should contain staticoptical cross-connection. The boards that support the dynamic optical cross-connection areclassified by equipment domain as follows:l For the OptiX BWS 1600G and the OptiX BWS 1600A: WSM9, WSD9, WSM5, WSD5

and RMU9.l For the OptiX Metro 6100V1E: WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, and WSMD4.l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 I/8800 II and OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A/8800 I(NA)/

8800 II(NA): WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, ROAM, WSMD4, 11RDU9, 11WSMD2, 12WSM9,12WSD9, 13WSM9, 13WSD9, RDU6, WSM6.

Typical OCh networking scenarios are as follows:

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-141

Page 178: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l The typical scenario of non-protected OCh networking is as follows:

OTU WSD WSMFIU

OSC

FIU FIU FIU

OSCOSC

ONE2

ONE3ONE1

D40 M40

OCh

OCh OCh

oxcfiber

OTU

OTU

OTU

l The typical scenario of protected OCh networking is as follows:

OTU

WSD WSM

OSC OSC

ONE2 ONE4ONE1

OChoxcfiber

OLP

FIU

OSC

WSD WSM

OSC

OSC

OSC

ONE3

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OLP

OTU

Networking scenarios of creating a third-party wavelength service or an unterminated OCh trailare as follows:l The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source or sink is the

third-party equipment.

l The following figures shows the third-party wavelength service whose source and sink arethe third-party equipment.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-142 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 179: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l In the WDM service configuration window, you can view the resource allocation of the entire network inan intuitive manner. When you create a service, available resources are automatically filtered and displayedin the topology view. The available resources can be the server links of the OTS level or higher levelsbetween NEs.

l When you create a trail, Auto-Calculation is selected by default. Route calculation is triggered when youspecify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation fails, an errormessage is displayed indicating the failure causes.

l If you clear the selection of Auto-Calculation, routes are not automatically calculated when you create atrail. You can click to Calculate Route check the correctness of a route.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 Set the level and direction of the service.Set the level to OCh and set the direction according to the specific networking.

Step 3 Specify the source and sink. Click Browse. In the Select Card Port-Source/Sink dialog box,select the NE, card, and port.

TIP

l During the selection of source or sink in the NE Panel, when you move the cursor to a board, thewavelength information of the board port is displayed.

l By default, if you already select one end (source or sink) of a trail and open the NE Panel to selectanother end, the U2000 uses the board and port that have the same band and wavelength with priority.

l After you select the Enable third-party wavelength service port check box in the lower portion ofthe window, you can create a trail whose source or sink is located on the multiplexing anddemultiplexing card (for example, M40 and D40) or the add/drop multiplexing card (for example, MR2and WSM9), or whose source and sink ports are located on such cards. This trail is a third-partywavelength service.

NOTE

l By default, the selected wavelength frequency is the current wavelength frequency of a (source) sink port.You can select another proper wavelength frequency to meet the actual requirements.

l After the wavelength frequency for a source (sink) port is selected, the same wavelength frequency is selectedfirst for the corresponding sink (source) port. If the same wavelength frequency is not available for thecorresponding sink (source) port, the current wavelength frequency of the selected sink (source) port isselected by default.

Step 4 Optional: Specify route constraints.1. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcut

menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing server trails and

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-143

Page 180: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. You can select only the topmostserver trail.

2. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Explicit Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

3. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the shortcutmenu. In the Add Excluded Node window displayed, you can search for the nodes and setthem as the explicit nodes of the trails to be created.

4. Specify the route channel. Click Specify Route Channel. In the Specify Route Channeldialog box, you can modify the topmost server trail for the working route.

5. Click Cancel Route Restriction to cancel the settings.TIP

You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create a service, the server links ofthe OTS level or higher levels are automatically filtered and displayed in green in the topology view. Afterroutes are successfully calculated, the working route is displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.l Specify the explicit link. Click a server trail between the NEs to specify the explicit route. Click the

trail again to cancel the selection. Click a server link in green between the source and sink NEs. In thedialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels for the service. Click the trailagain to cancel the selection.

l Specify the explicit node. Click the Explicit Node tab. Double-click an NE to specify the explicit NEof the route. This NE is shown as the icon. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the excluded node. Click the Excluded Node tab. You can specify the NE that the route of thetrail to be created is not allowed to pass through by double-clicking the NE. The selected NE is markedwith sign. Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

l Specify the route channel. Right-click the working route in blue and choose Trail ChannelSelection from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the topmost server trailfor the working route.

NOTE

After routes are successfully calculated, the list of the server routes for the trail to be created are displayedin the lower portion of the topology view.Choose Browse Relevant Trails from the shortcut menu to switch to the WDM Trail Managementwindow. In this window, you can view the details of the server trail of the trail to be created. The fiber doesnot support this function.

Step 5 Configure general attributes. Click the General Attributes, set the general trail attributes,including the name and ID.

Step 6 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the followingoperations as required.l Click OPA Mode. In the OPA Mode dialog box, set the optical power adjustment mode

to Auto or Manual for the OCh trail to be created. For details, see 2.1.9.10 Modifying theOptical Power Adjustment Mode of a WDM Trail.

l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after itis created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on theU2000.

l If you select the Set Optical Power After Creation check box, after you create a trailsuccessfully, the Optical Power Management window is displayed for you to learn therelevant optical power. For details of the function, see 2.1.8.7 Viewing the Optical Powerfor the Trails.

Step 7 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-144 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 181: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Result

After refreshing the WDM Trail Management window, you can view the new WDM trail.

If the route calculation or route creation fails, an error message is displayed indicating the failurecauses. Click Analyze Route. In the Analyze Route dialog box, you can view the details of thefailure causes.

PostrequisiteIf a fiber is connected to the source or sink of the new third-party wavelength service, the servicewill be extended after a trail search.

2.3.3 Creating EAPE ObjectsThe U2000 supports configuring the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) for a trail.For a WDM service configured with the EAPE, the U2000 fine-tunes the optical power of thetransmit end according to signal quality detected by the receive end. This can improve the signalquality.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l An OCh trail must be created or searched out.

Background Information

To create an EAPE pair correctly, the OCh trail must meet the following:

l The source and sink board must be the OTU boards.l The board with the VOA unit must be configured on the trail.l If the protection is configured on the trail, the selective receiving unit at the sink must be

the OLP or DCP. In addition, the board with the VOA unit need be configured on theprotection trail.

l EAPE requires that the adjustment unit is configured on the transmit-end station and theOTU detection unit is configured on the receive-end station.

l Source and sink OTU boards cannot be installed on the same NE.l The working and protection adjustment units can be configured in different slots on the

same NE.l When the corresponding EAPE pairs exist on an OCh trail, you cannot modify or deactivate

the trail.l In the case of the OCh path with the electrical REG, the OCh path is equivalent to two

independent wavelengths. Thus, you need configure two EAPE pairs on the OCh path.l EAPE can monitor only the trails on a complete end-to-end wavelength. Thus, no

wavelength can be added or dropped along the trail.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu. Select filter criteria accordingto requirements.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-145

Page 182: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select EAPE Management from the drop-down menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click New to create the EAPE management.

NOTE

l You need not configure the data of the EAPE objects. The U2000 automatically calculates and then appliesthe data to the sink NE. The data of the EAPE objects is not displayed in the user interface. By default, theadjustment board nearest to the source is used.

l If the OLP dual fed board is available, a power adjustment board for the protection trail is required.

----End

2.3.4 Querying EAPE ObjectsOn the U2000, you can query the enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) objects thatare already created on the trail and enable or disable the EAPE adjustment.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.

l An OCh trail must be created or searched out.

l The EAPE must be created correctly.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteriaaccording to requirements.

Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance, and select EAPE Management from the drop-down menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-146 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 183: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 3 Click Query to query the EAPE.

----End

2.3.5 Starting EAPE AdjustmentIn the case of a WDM service configured with EAPE, when the OTU at the sink end detects thesignal degrade, an exceptional EAPE event is reported to and displayed on the U2000. This eventprompts the user to start EAPE adjustment so that the VOA at the source end finely tunes theoptical power at the transmit end. This can enhance the signal quality.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The EAPE must be created.l The 15-min performance monitoring must be started on the sink NE.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteriaaccording to requirements.

Step 2 Select a desired OCh trail, click Maintenance , and select EAPE Management from the drop-down menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 If the Status is Can Be Adjusted, click Start Adjustment to start adjusting the EAPE.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-147

Page 184: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

l When the adjustment is finished, Status changes to Adjustment Not Required.

l Status indicates the current adjustment status of the EAPE. The status can be Adjustment NotRequired, Can Be Adjusted, Being Adjusted, Unequalized, or Not Specified. Unequalizedindicates that the optical power received by the sink end exceeds the threshold or the received signaldegrades.

If the WDM service configured with EAPE is a bidirectional service, after starting the EAPE adjustmentof the OCh trail that load the reverse direction service, repeat Step 1 to 3 to start the EAPE adjustment ofthe OCh trail that load the positive direction service.

----End

2.3.6 Deleting EAPE ObjectsWhen the EAPE function on the trail is not required, you can manually delete the EAPE.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network operator" authority or higher.l The EAPE must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu. Select filter criteriaaccording to requirements.

Step 2 Select an OCh trail whose EAPE that you want to delete, click Maintenance, and select EAPEManagement from the drop-down menu. The EAPE Management dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click Delete to delete the EAPE objects on the trail.

Step 4 Optional: In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > EAPEManagement from the Function Tree, select the EAPE objects that you want to delete, clickdelete.

NOTE

When the OCh trail whose EAPE that you want to delete is not found in the trail management interface,you can perform this step to delete the EAPE objects.

----End

2.4 Managing Alarms on WDM TrailsYou can use the U2000 function of end-to-end trail management to manage the alarms generatedon WDM trails at the network layer.

2.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM TrailBy querying current alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about faults on this trail to performmaintenance in a timely and effective manner.

2.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM TrailBy querying history alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about history faults on this trail andprovide reference for maintenance of current faults.

2.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real Time

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-148 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 185: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

The U2000 can manage the networkwide WDM alarm trails in real time. It manages all theWDM trails that have current alarms. If an alarm ends, the related trail is automatically removedfrom the user interface.

2.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlationAfter a fault occurs, the NE may report a lot of alarms. By analyzing the alarm correlation, youcan quickly locate the fault to the root alarm.

2.4.1 Viewing Current Alarms of a WDM TrailBy querying current alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about faults on this trail to performmaintenance in a timely and effective manner.

Prerequisitel To view the alarms, You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or

higher. To acknowledge, check, synchronize and delete alarms, You must be an NM userwith "network operator" authority or higher.

l The WDM trail must be created.

ContextTIPOn the Main Topology, expand the link between two NEs, right-click a certain trail level, such as Client,and choose Browse Current Alarm from the shortcut menu. You can view the current alarms of all theClient trails that traverse the two NEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Optional: Select a trail that contained alarm, right-click in the Transmission Media LayerRoute or Signal Flow Diagram window, and choose Display Alarm from the shortcut menu.If the NEs have alarms, each of the NE icons is indicated with a specific alarm color. When youhold the cursor on any one of the NE icons, alarm information of the NE is displayed.

Step 4 Select one or several desired trails , click Alarm, and choose Current Alarm from the drop-down menu. The current alarms on this trail are displayed in the window.

NOTE

Click an alarm. The details of the alarm and the recommended handling are displayed in the pane below.

Step 5 Optional: To display the latest alarms, check the Display latest alarms check box.

Step 6 Optional: To check the alarms, select one or more alarms. Right-click alarms and choose CheckAlarms.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-149

Page 186: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

When you check the alarm, you are comparing one or more uncleared alarms on the U2000 with those onthe NE. If the alarm exists as a current alarm in the NE, it means that the alarm information remainsunchanged on the U2000. If the alarm does not exist in the NE, the alarm is cleared on the U2000.

Step 7 Optional: To acknowledge the alarms, select one or more alarms and click Acknowledge. Inthe Acknowledge Alarms dialog box displayed, click Yes.

NOTE

Acknowledged and cleared alarms automatically change to history alarms.

Step 8 Optional: To delete the alarms, select one or more alarms and click Delete. In the Delete theAlarms dialog box displayed, click Yes.

Step 9 Optional: To view the trails, customers, and protection subnets that are affected by an alarm,you can select one alarm, right-click, and choose the required menu item, for example,Protection Subnet.

----End

2.4.2 Viewing History Alarms of a WDM TrailBy querying history alarms of a WDM trail, you can learn about history faults on this trail andprovide reference for maintenance of current faults.

Prerequisitel To view the alarms, You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or

higher. To acknowledge, check, synchronize and delete alarms, You must be an NM userwith "network operator" authority or higher.

l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click IncrementalFilter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a desired trail, click Alarm, and choose History Alarm from the drop-down menu.The history alarms on this trail are displayed in the window.

Step 4 Learn about the history alarms reported on this trail to provide reference for maintenance ofcurrent faults.

----End

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-150 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 187: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.4.3 Managing Networkwide WDM Alarm Trails in Real TimeThe U2000 can manage the networkwide WDM alarm trails in real time. It manages all theWDM trails that have current alarms. If an alarm ends, the related trail is automatically removedfrom the user interface.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Fault > Service Monitoring > Real-Time Faulty WDM Trail Management from theMain Menu.

Step 2 Set the trail filter criteria and click Filter All.

Step 3 In the Alarm Affected WDM Trails window displayed, the alarm affected WDM trails thatmeet the criteria are displayed.

Step 4 Optional: Right-click the title of a parameter column and set the trail attributes to be displayed.

Step 5 Choose Alarm. Select the corresponding command from the drop-down menu to query or setthe alarm data of each trail.

Step 6 Optional: To query the performance data of a trail, click Performance > BrowsePerformance.

Step 7 Optional: To print the trail information, click Print. To save the trail information, click SaveAs.

----End

2.4.4 Analyzing WDM alarm correlationAfter a fault occurs, the NE may report a lot of alarms. By analyzing the alarm correlation, youcan quickly locate the fault to the root alarm.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Fault > Correlation Analysis > Trail Alarm Correlation Rules from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Create in the Alarm Correlation Rules dialog box, a rule of alarm correlation is created.

NOTE

You can also modify the existed alarm correlation rules.

Step 3 Set the Alarm1, Alarm2, Conditions and Action of the new rule.

NOTE

When you select Enable Automatic Correlation Analysis, dynamic analysis of the root alarm is adopted.

When you deselect Enable Automatic Correlation Analysis, static analysis of the root alarm is adopted.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-151

Page 188: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

Step 6 Click Close in the Alarm Correlation Rules dialog box.

Step 7 Choose Fault > Browse Alarm List from the Main Menu.

Step 8 In the Filter dialog box that is displayed, set the filtering criteria, and click OK.

Step 9 Optional: If use the dynamically analyzing trail root alarms, right-click a root alarm and choosecorrelative alarms from the shortcut menu to display the correlative alarms suppressed by thisroot alarm.

Step 10 Optional: If use the static analyzing trail root alarms, choose Fault > Correlation Analysis >Analyze Trail Alarm Correlation from the Main Menu.

1. Click OK in the Correlation Analysis for Current Alarm dialog box.

2. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box, the root alarm informations are displays in the BrowseRoot Alarm.

----End

2.5 Managing the Performance of WDM TrailsYou can use the network layer function of the U2000 to perform end-to-end performancemanagement on WDM trails.

2.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM TrailsYou can find out the running status of the service carried by the WDM trails by querying theperformance data.

2.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM TrailsBy querying the history performance data of a WDM trail, you can learn about the running statusof the services carried on the trail in a specific period in the past and provide reference foranalyzing the current performance of this trail.

2.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM TrailsYou can view performance UAT of WDM trails to know the UAT events of the WDM trails.

2.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDM TrailsYou can view performance threshold-crossing record of WDM trails to know the performancethreshold-crossing events of the WDM trails.

2.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM TrailsYou can view ethernet performance of WDM trails to know the RMON performance of thewhole trails.

2.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM TrailPerformance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the performance of services over a trail,helping the maintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the states of services.

2.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance ThresholdIn this user interface, you can set performance thresholds based on a trail. Specifically, you canset the corresponding performance thresholds for the performance events and performance typeson the source and sink of a trail.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-152 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 189: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.5.1 Viewing Current Performance Data of WDM TrailsYou can find out the running status of the service carried by the WDM trails by querying theperformance data.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail, click Performance and select Browse Performance from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click the 15-Minute Current Performance or 24-Hour Current Performance tab and querythe latest 15-minute or 24-hour performance data of the trail. Perform the maintenance operationaccording to the current performance events.

Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select theDisplay all monitored objects check box.

NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trailtraverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sinknodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualifiedperformance events are displayed.

----End

2.5.2 Viewing History Performance Data of WDM TrailsBy querying the history performance data of a WDM trail, you can learn about the running statusof the services carried on the trail in a specific period in the past and provide reference foranalyzing the current performance of this trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-153

Page 190: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a desired trail, click Performance and select Browse Performance from the drop-downlist.

Step 4 Click the 15-Minute History Performance or 24-Hour History Performance tab and viewthe history performance data.

Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select theDisplay all monitored objects check box.

NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trailtraverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sinknodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualifiedperformance events are displayed.

Step 7 Optional: Click Graph. In the displayed window, select Performance Event and Monitor

Object. Click and then click Show to view the graphic display.

NOTE

l By displaying data in a graph, you can clearly learn the performance change trend in a certain period.

l Applies to the performance events related to the optical power only.

----End

2.5.3 Viewing UAT of WDM TrailsYou can view performance UAT of WDM trails to know the UAT events of the WDM trails.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, click Performance, choose Browse Performance.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-154 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 191: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 click UAT tab to view the UAT events of the WDM trails.

Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select theDisplay all monitored objects check box.

NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trailtraverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sinknodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualifiedperformance events are displayed.

----End

2.5.4 Viewing Performance Threshold-Crossing Records of WDMTrails

You can view performance threshold-crossing record of WDM trails to know the performancethreshold-crossing events of the WDM trails.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.

l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, click Performance, choose Browse Performance.

Step 4 Click performance threshold-crossing record tab to view the performance threshold-crossingevents of the WDM trails.

Step 5 Optional: To browse the performance events on the NEs that the trail traverses, select theDisplay all monitored objects check box.

NOTE

If this check box is selected, the performance events of the source, sink, and intermediate nodes that a trailtraverse are displayed. If this check box is cleared, the performance events of only the source and sinknodes of a trail are displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Filter. In the Filter dialog box, set the filter criteria and click OK. The qualifiedperformance events are displayed.

----End

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-155

Page 192: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.5.5 Viewing Ethernet Performance of WDM TrailsYou can view ethernet performance of WDM trails to know the RMON performance of thewhole trails.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM client trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or several trails, Click Performance, choose Ethernet Performance.

Step 4 Optional: Select a trail, click , then click Graph, and then select all the object andselect Performance Event. click draw. The diagram shows the changes in a performance eventof a certain object at different time.

----End

2.5.6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an WDM TrailPerformance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the performance of services over a trail,helping the maintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the states of services.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The WDM trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select a trail. Click Performance and choose Performance Parameter from the drop-downmenu.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-156 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 193: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 In the Performance Parameter dialog box displayed, select an object, and set the monitoringstatus and auto reporting status.

Step 5 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

2.5.7 Setting WDM Trail Performance ThresholdIn this user interface, you can set performance thresholds based on a trail. Specifically, you canset the corresponding performance thresholds for the performance events and performance typeson the source and sink of a trail.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "network monitor" authority or higher.l The trail must be created.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and viewthe desired trails in the trail list.l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental

Filter.l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or more trails. Click Performance and choose Performance Threshold from thedrop-down menu.

Step 4 In the Performance Threshold window, double-click Threshold Value to change theperformance threshold value.

Step 5 Click Apply, in the Operation Result window, click Close.

Step 6 Click Cancel to exit the Performance Threshold window.

----End

2.6 Configuring Board ParametersWhen configuring WDM services, you need to configure different boards in the network. Thevarious types of boards and the procedure for configuring the board parameters are describedhere.

2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board

2.6.2 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

2.6.3 Service TypeThis topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-157

Page 194: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.6.4 Configuring the Service TypeThe services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interfaceof the board is the same as the actual service type.

2.6.5 Modifying PortThe client-side port and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM can be a color portor a colorless port. Set the port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) opticalmodule used in the equipment. of the OTU board can be a color port or a colorless port. Set theport type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.

2.6.6 Creating Cross-ConnectionsBy creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for asingle service.

2.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

2.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)

2.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection ConfigurationIn this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

2.6.1 Configuring the Working Mode of the Board

2.6.1.1 About the Working ModesThis section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signalflow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set tospecific values.

2.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM boardThis section describes the rules for configuring the 52TOM board.

2.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM BoardBefore using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port workingmode for the 52TOM board.

2.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 boardThe default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode isswitched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interfaceaccording to this section.

2.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUsBefore you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes ofthe boards.

2.6.1.1 About the Working ModesThis section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signalflow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set tospecific values.

Board Working modeThe U2000 supports four board working modes: NS1 Mode, TQM Mode, Cascading, andNon-Cascading.

The 12LQMS board supports NS1 Mode and TQM Mode.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-158 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 195: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l In NS1 Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a line board that performs the mutualconversion between the ODUk electrical signals and the optical signals at a WDM system-compliant standard wavelength.

l In TQM Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a tributary-line board that performs themutual conversion between the client-side signals and the optical signals at a WDM system-compliant standard wavelength.

The 11TOM and 52TOM boards support the Cascading and Non-Cascading modes.

l In Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can beinput to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the client side, and then are multiplexed intodifferent timeslots of one or two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.

l In Non-Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services canbe input to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side, andthen are multiplexed into different timeslots of one to eight ODU0 services or one to fourODU1 services.

NOTE

A specific service signal flow of the 52TOM board is available only when both the board working mode andport working mode are set to specific values.

Port Working Mode

The 52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, applicationscenarios such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and tributary or tributary-line mode of theports on the board should be set. As shown in Table 2-32, the 52TOM board supports 14 workingmodes.

Table 2-32 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board

Board Working mode Port Working Mode Signal Flow

Cascading

ODU0 Tributary Mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]

ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1

ODU1 Tributary Mode Any->ODU1

ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode Any->ODU1->OTU1

NONE Mode -

Non-Cascading

ODU0 Tributary Mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]

ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1

Application 1 of ODU1Tributary Mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1

Application 2 of ODU1Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->ODU0

Application 3 of ODU1Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-159

Page 196: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Board Working mode Port Working Mode Signal Flow

Application 4 of ODU1Tributary Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1

Application 1 of ODU1Tributary-Line Mode

OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1

Application 2 of ODU1Tributary-Line Mode

OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1

NONE Mode -

NOTE

[->**]: indicates that "**" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there aretwo service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.

NONE Mode: indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other ports.

2.6.1.2 Configuration Rules of the 52TOM board

This section describes the rules for configuring the 52TOM board.

The rules for configuring the 52TOM board are as follows:

l In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to different portworking modes.

l The OptiX OSN 8800 series does not support distributed cross-connection.

l In tributary-line mode, the ODU1 service does not support centralized cross-connection.

l The 52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane. Inthe OptiX OSN 6800/3800, the 52TOM board can groom Any services on the oppositeboard but cannot groom Any services throughout the full-mesh network. Particularly, inthe OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3.1 porton the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1.3 port on the 52NS2 board, theClientLP5.1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1.2 port on the52NS2 board, and the rest may be deduced by analogy.

l The OptiX OSN 6800/3800 cannot groom the ODU0 service and thus does not support thefollowing port working mode application scenarios:

– Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 2 (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

– Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 3 (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)

l The OptiX OSN 8800 series does not support the following port working mode applicationscenario:

– Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 4 (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-160 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 197: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.6.1.3 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM BoardBefore using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port workingmode for the 52TOM board.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The 52TOM board must be created.

No cross-connection exists on the board when the board-level mode switching occurs on theboard.

No logical fiber exists on the optical interface when the board-level mode switching occurs onthe board.

ContextYou can set the Cascading or Non-Cascading mode for the 11TOM and 52TOM boards.l When the Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any services of

multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side ofthe board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to differenttimeslots of the one-channel or two-channel ODU0 or the one-channel ODU1.

l When the Non-Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any servicesof multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side ofthe board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to differenttimeslots of the one-channel (maximumly eight-channel) ODU0 or the one-channel(maximumly four-channel) ODU1.

NOTE

In the case of a 52TOM board, you need to set the cascading or non-cascading mode for the board, and theapplication mode, such as the ODU0 mapping, ODU1 mapping, tributary mode, and tributary-line mode,for each port. In this way, different signal flows can be realized. There are 14 types of working modes forthe 52TOM boards.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a 52TOM board, and choose Configuration > Working Mode fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, set Board Working Mode to Cascading or Non-Cascading.

Step 3 In the Port Working Mode pane, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the PortWorking Mode field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

2.6.1.4 Configuring the Working Mode of the LQM2 boardThe default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode isswitched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interfaceaccording to this section.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-161

Page 198: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The physical and logical LQM2 board must be configured.

Background Information

This section describes how to configure the LQM2 board and add an optical interface when theworking mode of the board is switched from 2LQM Mode to AP8 Mode. When the workingmode of the board is switched from AP8 Mode to 2LQM Mode, the configuration of the boardis similar except that you do not need to add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface.

Procedure

Step 1 Delete the cross-connections on the LQM2 board:1. In the NE Explorer, click the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Service

Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. The Working cross-connection fielddisplays all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board.

2. Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, and then click Deactivate.The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.4. Click Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.5. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Delete the service type on the LQM2 board:1. In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel

from the drop-down list. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Service Type of opticalinterface 3 to optical interface 10 to None, and then click Apply.

3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Change the working mode of the LQM2 board:1. Select By Function and then choose Board Mode from the drop-down menu.2. Set Board Mode to AP8 Mode, and then click Apply.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-162 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 199: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface of the LQM2 board:1. In the NE Explorer, right-click the LQM2 board and then choose Path View. The Path

View window is displayed.2. Right-click the blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add

Port.

3. The Add Port dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree. On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port(Channel). On the Basic Attributes tab page, click Query.

----End

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-163

Page 200: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

2.6.1.5 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUsBefore you use OTU boards such as the 11TOM, you need to configure the working modes ofthe boards.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The necessary OTU boards must be created.

Applies to the 11TOM 12LQMS and 12ND2 boards.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the desired port on the board, and then double-click Board Mode to choose the desiredport working mode from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

2.6.2 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

Prerequisitel You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.l Applicable boards: 11TOM, 12LQMD, 12LQMS, 12TQM, 13LQM, and 52TOM.

Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical interface. Double-click theService Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-164 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 201: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

2.6.3 Service TypeThis topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.

Access ServiceThe OptiX OSN 1800, OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 8800 series supportmultiple access services, such as the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) service, theSynchronous Optical Network (SONET) service, Ethernet service, Storage Area Network (SAN)service, Optical Transport Network (OTN) service, and video service.

Table 2-33 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support.

Table 2-33 Service access function

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH service, POSservice, ATM service

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64,STM-256

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957ITU-T G.693

SONET service OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768 GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCON, FICON, FICON Express, FC50,FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200

ANSI X3.296ANSI X3.303

OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU3 ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1

Video service andothers

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, SDI,FDDI

EN 50083-9SMPTE 292MSMPTE 259M

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-165

Page 202: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

FE: Fast EthernetGE: Gigabit EthernetESCON: Enterprise systems connectionFICON: Fiber connectionFC: Fiber channelHDTV: High definition TVDVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interfaceDVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interfaceSDI: Serial digital interfaceFDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

Table 2-34 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 8800 series supports.

Table 2-34 Service access function

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH service, POSservice, ATMservice

STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64,STM-256

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957ITU-T G.693

SONET service OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768 GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae

SAN service ESCON, FICON, FICON Express,FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800,FC1200

ANSI X3.296ANSI X3.303

OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU2e ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1

Video service andothers

HDTV, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, SDI,FDDI

EN 50083-9SMPTE 292MSMPTE 259M

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-166 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 203: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

FE: Fast EthernetGE: Gigabit EthernetESCON: Enterprise systems connectionFICON: Fiber connectionFC: Fiber channelHDTV: High definition TVDVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interfaceDVB-SDI: Digital video broadcasting-serial digital interfaceSDI: Serial digital interfaceFDDI: Fiber distributed data interface

Table 2-35 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 1800 supports.

Table 2-35 Types of Service Access

Classification Reference Standard Service Type

Standard SDHservice

ITU-T G.707ITU-T G.691ITU-T G.957

STM-64 standard orconcatenation service

STM-16 standard orconcatenation service

STM-4 standard or concatenationservice

STM-1 standard service

Standard SONETservice

GR-253-COREGR-1377-COREANSI T1.105

OC-192 standard orconcatenation service

OC-48 standard or concatenationservice

OC-12 standard or concatenationservice

OC-3 standard service

Ethernet service IEEE 802.3uIEEE 802.3zIEEE 802.3ae

10 GE LAN service

10 GE WAN service

Gigabit Ethernet (GE) service

Fast Ethernet (FE) service

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-167

Page 204: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Classification Reference Standard Service Type

SAN service ANSI X3.296ANSI X3.303

FC100 serviceFC400 serviceFICON(Fiber Connection)service

FC200 serviceFICON Express service

ESCON(Enterprise SystemsConnection) service

OTN servicea ITU-T G.709ITU-T G.959.1

OTU2/OTU2v service

OTU1 service

GPON service G.984 OLT (Optical Line Terminal) sidesignal

ONU (Optical Network Unit) sidesignal

GPON signal

EPON service IEEE802.3ah OLT (Optical Line Terminal) sidesignal

ONU (Optical Network Unit) sidesignal

DVB-ASI(DigitalVideo Broadcasting-AsynchronousSerial Interface)service

EN 50083-9 -

HDTV(HighDefinition TV)service

SMPTE 292MSMPTE 259M

-

Fiber DistributedData Interface(FDDI) service

EN 50083-9 -

Other 42 Mbit/s to2.67 Gbit/s service

- -

a: Transponder features transparent transmission.b: TMUX indicates low speed service convergence transmission.c: OTU1 and OTU2 indicate the optical channel transport unit defined by the ITU-T G.709.d: REG indicates bidirectional regeneration of service.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-168 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 205: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

The PON services that can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN 1800 can be GPON or EPON.In the case of GPON and EPON services, no service configuration needs to be made on the board by usingthe network management system.

Table 2-36 lists the access services that the OptiX BWS 1600G supports.

Table 2-36 Service types supported by the system

Classification Service Types Service Transmission Mode

Standard SDH service STM-256 standard service Transponder b: 1xSTM-256-->OTU3

IMUX c: 1xSTM-256-->4xOTU2

STM-64 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-64-->OTU2

STM-16 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-16-->STM-16/OTU1

TMUX d: 4xSTM-16--> 1xOTU2

STM-4 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xSTM-4--> 1xSTM-4TMUX: 4xSTM-4-->1xSTM-16/OTU1

STM-1 standard service Transponder: 1xSTM-1-->1xSTM-1TMUX: 4xSTM-1-->1xOTU1

Standard SONETservice

OC-768 standard service Transponder b: 1xOC-768-->OTU3

IMUX c: 1xOC-768-->4xOTU2

OC-192 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-192-->OTU2

OC-48 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-48-->OC-48/OTU1

TMUX d: 4xOC-48--> 1xOTU2

OC-12 standard orconcatenation service

Transponder: 1xOC-12-->1xOC-12TMUX: 4xOC-12-->1xOTU1

OC-3 standard service Transponder: 1xOC-3-->1xOC-3TMUX: 4xOC-3-->1xOC-48/OTU1

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-169

Page 206: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Classification Service Types Service Transmission Mode

OTN service a OTU1 service Transponder: 1xOTU1-->1xOTU1TMUX: 4xOTU1--> 1xOTU2

OTU2 service Transponder: 1xOTU2-->1xOTU2

FC (Fiber Channel)service

FC100 service TMUX: 8xFC100 --> 1xOTU2TMUX: 2xFC100 -->1xSTM-16Transponder: 1xFC100 -->1xFC100

FC200 service TMUX: 4xFC200 --> 1xOTU2Transponder: 1xFC200 -->1xFC200

FC400 service TMUX: 2xFC400 --> 1xOTU2

FC 10G service Transponder: 1xFC 10G -->1xOTU2

POS service Packet Over SDH/SONETservice

Transponder: 1xPOS -->1xPOSTMUX: 4x POS--> 1xOTU1

Ethernet service Gigabit Ethernet (GE) service TMUX: 2xGE--> 1xSTM-16/OTU1TMUX: 8xGE--> 1xOTU2TMUX: 4xFC200/FC100/GE--> 1xOTU2

10 GE service Transponder: 1x 10GE -->1xOTU2

Any 34 Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s service

Enterprise Systems Connection(ESCON) service

TMUX: 4 x 100 Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s service signals in anyprotocol --> 1 x OTU1Transponder: transparenttransmission of 100 Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s service signals in anyprotocol

Fiber Channel (FC) service

Fiber Connection (FICON)service

Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) service

PDH (34M/45M/140M) service

Fast Ethernet (FE)

Digital Video Broadcasting -Asynchronous Serial Interface(DVB-ASI)

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-170 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 207: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Classification Service Types Service Transmission Mode

a: OTU1 and OTU2 indicate the optical channel transport unit defined by the ITU-T G.709.b: Transponder features transparent transmission.c: IMUX indicates inverse multiplexing transmission.d: TMUX indicates low speed service convergence transmission.

2.6.4 Configuring the Service TypeThe services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interfaceof the board is the same as the actual service type.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

ProcedureStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from

the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the ServiceType field and select the required service type.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-171

Page 208: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

2.6.5 Modifying PortThe client-side port and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM can be a color portor a colorless port. Set the port type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) opticalmodule used in the equipment. of the OTU board can be a color port or a colorless port. Set theport type based on the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The LSX/LSXR and LSXL/LSXLR boards do not support this function.

Background InformationNOTE

During the creation of OTU boards, the client-side port is added by default. The port type is the client-sideblack and white optical port by default.

The following equipment is supported: OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiXOSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.

During the creation of OTU boards, the client-side port is added by default. The port type is theclient-side colorless optical port by default.

ProcedureStep 1 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port from

the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to applythe configuration.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-172 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 209: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTEIf you need to modify Type to Line Side Color Optical Port, you must first delete the port, and then addthe port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully. GETH, you must first delete the port, andthen add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

Step 2 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.

Step 3 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port dialogbox displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.

----End

Parameters

Table 2-37 lists the related parameters of the client-side port.

Table 2-37 Parameters of the Client-Side Port

Field Value Description

Port For example: 6 Displays the number of the client-side port.

Type Client Side Blackand WhiteOptical Port,Client Side ColorOptical Port,Electrical Port,Line Side Blackand WhiteOptical Port,Line Side ColorOptical Port

Specifies the type of the port. For example:l Client Side Black and White Optical Port: There

is no concept of wavelength for optical ports. Theactual wavelength is a invalid value by default.

l Client Side Color Optical Port: Wavelengthsshould be configured and the configuration ofoptical layer services can be performed.

Level l For ClientSide Blackand WhiteOptical Portand ClientSide ColorOptical Port:FE,GEGETH

l ForElectricalPort: FE,GEGETH

Sets level for the client side optical port.

2.6.6 Creating Cross-ConnectionsBy creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for asingle service.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-173

Page 210: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background InformationFor cross-connect slot limitations, see Overview.

CAUTIONWhen configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service, you must make sure that theWDM-side optical channel numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a directionmust be the same. Otherwise, the service fails.

Procedure

Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDMinterface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 2.6.4 Configuring the ServiceType.

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. For parameter descriptions, see 2.6.9 GUIParameter Description: WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Step 4 Select corresponding values for Level and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-174 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 211: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

NOTE

In the case of the LQM2 board on the OptiX OSN 1800, the available LP optical interface varies accordingto the board mode.l When Board Mode is AP8 Mode, only optical interface 201(LP1/LP1) can be selected on the

U2000.l When Board Mode is 2LQM Mode, optical interface 201(LP1/LP1) or 202(LP2/LP2) can be selected

on the U2000. In addition, a pair of source and sink optical interfaces can be formed between 201(LP1/LP1) and 3(RX1/TX1), between 201(LP1/LP1) and 4(RX2/TX2), between 202(LP2/LP2) and 7(RX5/TX5), or between 202(LP2/LP2) and 8(RX6/TX6).

Step 5 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

2.6.7 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

DescriptionThe Service Mode parameter provides an option to query and set the working mode of a boardon the line side.

Impact on the SystemNone.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-175

Page 212: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Values

For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG

Value Range Default Value

OTN, SDH OTN

For the ND2, TN12NS2 and NQ2

Value Range Default Value

ODU1, ODU2, Automatic Automatic

For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, and TQM

Value Range Default Value

Client Mode , OTN Mode Client Mode

For OptiX BWS 1600G/1600S/1600A

Value Range Default Value

OTN, SDH OTN

Configuration Guidelinesl In the case of LH WDM equipment:

The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same asthat at the opposite end. The mode of line-side services should be set to SDH when an SDHservice board needs to be connected.

l In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side servicesof boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. Whena local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the modeof line-side services should be set to SDH.

l In the case of the ND2, TN12NS2 and NQ2 boards:

– When you groom the ODU1 services, you must set the ODU1 mode must be configured

– When you groom When you groom the ODU1 services, you must set the ODU2 mode.

– When you groom the ODU1 or ODU2 services, the Service Mode is assigned to boardsautomatically and needs not be specified.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-176 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 213: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

l In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, and TQM boards: When the client sideaccesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accessesother services, set this parameter to Client Mode.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

2.6.8 Service Type (WDM Interface)

Description

The Service Type parameter provides an option to set the type of the service accessed at theoptical interface on the client side.

This parameter is applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

Impact on the System

Set this parameter according to the actual service. If this parameter is set inproperly, the servicemay be unavailable.

Values

For OptiX BWS 1600G/1600S

Value Range Default Value

SDH, SONET, OTU1, OTU2, 10GE(LAN),NOFRAME, FC10G, OTU2(10.7G), OTU2e(11.09G), OTU2e(11.1G), OTU2e(11.3G),OTU2v(10.7G)

SDH

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

SDH Indicates that the standard SDH service is accessed on theclient side.

SONET Indicates that the standard SONE service is accessed on theclient side.

OTU1 Indicates that the OTU1 service is accessed on the client side.

OTU2 Indicates that the OTU2 service is accessed on the client side.

10GE(LAN) Indicates that the 10 GE service is accessed on the client side.

NOFRAME Indicates that the NOFRAME service is accessed on the clientside.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-177

Page 214: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Value Description

FC10G Indicates that the FC10G service is accessed on the client side.

OTU2(10.7G) Indicates that the OTU2(10.7G) service is accessed on theclient side.

OTU2e(11.09G) Indicates that the OTU2e(11.09G) service is accessed on theclient side.

OTU2e(11.1G) Indicates that the OTU2e(11.1G) service is accessed on theclient side.

OTU2e(11.3G) Indicates that the OTU2e(11.3G) service is accessed on theclient side.

OTU2v(10.7G) Indicates that the OTU2v(10.7G) service is accessed on theclient side.

For OptiX OSN 8800 T32/6800/3800:

Value Range Default Value

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, CLO, DVB-ASI,DVBSDI, ESCON, ETR, FC-100, FC-200,FC-400, FC-800, FC-1200, FDDI, FE,FICON, FICON Express, GE, HDTV, ISC1G, ISC 2G, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,OC-768, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU3e,STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-256,OTU2v, Infiniband 2.5G, Infiniband 5G,FC800, FICON8G, None

Vary with different boards

Configuration GuidelinesIn practical applications, select a corresponding service type according to the accessed signaltype. You can query or set the value of the parameter. For details, refer to HardwareDescription.

l In the case of the ETMX and ETMXS boards, the value can be SDH, SONET or OTU1.l In the case of the LBF and LBFS boards, the value can be SDH, SONET, OTU2, OTU2e

(11.09G), 10GE(LAN) or FC10G.l In the case of the IMX4 and IMX4S boards, the value can be SDH, SONET or NOFRAME.l In the case of the TMR and TMRS boards, when Auto-Adapter Enabled parameter is set

to Disable, the value can be OTU2(10.7G), OTU2e(11.1G), OTU2e(11.3G) and OTU2v(10.7G).

l In the case of other OTUs, the value can be either SDH or SONET.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-178 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 215: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

2.6.9 GUI Parameter Description: WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration

In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Navigation Path

In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.Click WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab.

Cautionsl If the configuration for a new service is incorrect, the system will not apply the configuration

to the NE, will remind the user with a prompt.

l Deactivating a service will interrupt the service.

l If you want to configure a dynamic cross-connection, you need to delete the default staticcross-connection first so as to release the port resource.

Buttons

Button Description

New Opens the Create Cross-connect Servicedialog box where you can create unprotectedcross-connections. After the creation, you canselect Apply to send configurations to theNE.

Create WXCP Service Opens the Create WXCP Service dialog boxwhere you can create WXCP cross-connections. After the creation, you canselect Activate Immediately to send theconfigurations to the NE.

Create SNCP Service Opens the Create SNCP Service dialog boxwhere you can create SNCP cross-connections. After the creation, you canselect Activate Immediately to send theconfigurations to the NE.

Create Default XC Displays the Create Default XC dialog boxto create all default dynamic cross-connections within the boards in the boardresource list. If a cross-connection isconfigured for a board, this board is notdisplayed in the Available Boards pane.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-179

Page 216: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Button Description

Delete Deletes the selected cross-connection. Makesure the cross-connection is deactivatedbefore this operation.

Activate Sends services to the NE.

Deactivate Deactivates services on the NE.

Shortcut Menu ItemsItem Description

Select All Selects all of the cross-connections in the cross-connectionlist.

Expand Displays cross-connections contained in a group.

Join Displays cross-connections as a group.

Activate Sends services to the NE.

Deactivate Deactivates services on the NE.

Convert to WXCP Service Converts a normal service to an WXCP service.The button is available only when the service is expanded anddisplayed as the unidirectional service.

Convert to Non-ProtectionService

Converts an WXCP working service to a non-protectionservice.

Convert to SNCP Service Converts a normal service to an SNCP service.The button is available only when the service is expanded anddisplayed as the unidirectional service.

SNCP Working ServiceConvert to Non-ProtectionService

Converts an SNCP working service to a non-protectionservice.Converting an SNCP working service to a non-protectionservice may interrupt the service.

SNCP Protection ServiceConvert to Non-ProtectionService

Converts an SNCP protection service to a non-protectionservice.Converting an SNCP protection service to a non-protectionservice may interrupt the service.

Delete Deletes the selected cross-connection. Make sure the cross-connection is deactivated before this operation.

Browse Relevant Trails Browses the trails that are related to the selected cross-connection.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-180 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 217: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Parameters

Table 2-38 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration

Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Level parameter is usedto differentiate the servicetypes configured whenelectrical cross-connectionsare configured.Click Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Service Type For example: FE, STM-1,FICON

The Service Type parameteris used to set the type of theservices for a port whencross-connections of Anyservices are configured, tomatch the type of the actualservices.Click Service Type (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Direction Unidirectional,Bidirectional.

The Direction parameterindicates the servicedirection mode when theWDM cross-connection isconfigured. It can set to eitherUnidirectional orBidirectional.Click Direction (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-181

Page 218: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Source Channel l Equipment that supportsthe master and slave shelfmanagement: shelf ID(shelf name)-slotnumber-board name-portnumber(port name)-channel number

l Equipment that does notsupport the master andslave shelf management:slot number-board name-port number(port name)-channel number

NullDefault: Null

The Source Channelparameter is used to query thetransmit channel of a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Source Channel(WDM Cross-Connection)for more information.

Sink Channel l Equipment that supportsthe master and slave shelfmanagement: shelf ID(shelf name)-slotnumber-board name-portnumber(port name)-channel number

l Equipment that does notsupport the master andslave shelf management:slot number-board name-port number(port name)-channel number

NullDefault: Null

The Sink Channel parameteris used to query the receivechannel of a certain electricalcross-connect service(unidirectional service flow).Click Sink Channel (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Activation Status Active, Inactive The Activation Statusparameter is used to displaywhether the service cross-connection configuration isactivated.Click Activation Status(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Service Origin For example: CreateManually

Displays the origin of theWDM service.

Lockout Status Unknown, Locked,UnlockedDefault: Unlocked

Indicates the lockout status ofan electrical cross-connection.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-182 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 219: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Trail Name For example: NE350-NE351-ODU2-001-40

Displays the trail name.

Remarks The Remarks parameterenables you to record theadditional information on theWDM cross-connectionwhen you create a WDMcross-connection.

Table 2-39 Create Cross-connect Service

Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Level parameter is usedto differentiate the servicetypes configured whenelectrical cross-connectionsare configured.Click Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Service Type Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Service Type parameteris used to set the type of theservices for a port whencross-connections of Anyservices are configured, tomatch the type of the actualservices.Click Service Type (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Direction Unidirectional,Bidirectional.Default: Unidirectional

The Direction parameterindicates the servicedirection mode when theWDM cross-connection isconfigured. It can set to eitherUnidirectional orBidirectional.Click Direction (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-183

Page 220: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Source Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Source Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the transmit OTUboard is located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Source Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Source Optical Port - The Source Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the transmit opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Source Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Source Optical Channel - The Source OpticalChannel parameter is used toset the number of the transmitchannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Source OpticalChannel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Sink Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Sink Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the receive OTU boardis located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Sink Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-184 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 221: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Sink Optical Port - The Sink Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the receive opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Sink Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Sink Optical Channel - The Sink Optical Channelparameter is used to set thenumber of the receivechannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Sink Optical Channel(WDM Cross-Connection)for more information.

Activate Immediately Active, InactiveDefault: Active

Sets whether to immediatelyactivate the cross-connection.

Remarks The Remarks parameterenables you to record theadditional information on theWDM cross-connectionwhen you create a WDMcross-connection.

Table 2-40 Create SNCP Service

Field Value Description

Protection Type SW SNCP, ODUK SNCP,MSSNCP

Specifies the level of the newSNCP service.NOTE

OptiX OSN 1800 series supportSW SNCP protection type only.

Click Protection Type(SNCP Protection) for moreinformation.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-185

Page 222: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

SNCP Type SNC/I, SNC/S, SNC/N Displays the protection typeof the service.NOTE

When you select ProtectionType is ODUK SNCP, you canset this parameter.

Click SNCP Type (SNCPProtection) for moreinformation.

Service Type For example: GE Displays the service type ofthe SNCP.

OTN Level For example: PM Sets the OTN level.NOTE

When you select SNCP Type isSNC/N or , SNC/S, you can setthis parameter.

Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-RevertiveDefault: Non-Revertive

Chooses whether the serviceis switched to the originalworking path after the failureis eliminated. If you want theservice to be switched back tothe original working paththen, select Revertive. If youdo not want the service to beswitched back then, selectNon-Revertive.Click Revertive Mode(SNCP Protection) for moreinformation.

WTR Time(mm:ss) 5:00 to 12:00 Sets the wait-to-restore time.It is the time interval betweenthe time when the workingservice is detected to benormal after switching andthe time when the service isswitched back to the workingpath. You can modify theWTR Time (s) only whenthe Revertive Mode isRevertive.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-186 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 223: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Working Channel Hold-OffTime(100ms)

0 to 100Default: 0

Sets the time intervalbetween the time when thesystem detects signal degradeand the time when the serviceswitching occurs, in order toavoid repeated switchingwhen the service status is notstable. The switching delaytime is in 100 milliseconds.For example, if you enter 5,the delay time is 500milliseconds.Click Working ChannelHold-Off Time (SNCPProtection) for moreinformation.

Protection Channel Hold-OffTime(100ms)

0 to 100Default: 0

Sets the time intervalbetween the time when thesystem detects signal degradeand the time when the serviceswitching occurs, in order toavoid repeated switchingwhen the service status is notstable. The switching delaytime is in 100 milliseconds.For example, if you enter 5,the delay time is 500milliseconds.Click Protection ChannelHold-Off Time (SNCPProtection) for moreinformation.

SD Enable Status Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Sets the SD enabling status.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-187

Page 224: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Direction Unidirectional, BidirectionalDefault: Unidirectional

l When you set Directionto Unidirectional, afteryou create the SNCP,only the selectivereceiving function isimplemented. To ensurethe service availability,you must create tworoutes in the reversedirection on the source.

l When you set Directionto Bidirectional, theU2000 automaticallycreates two routes in thereverse direction.

Remarks The Remarks parameterenables you to record theadditional information on theSNCP service when youcreate an SNCP service.

Source Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Source Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the transmit OTUboard is located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Source Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Source Optical Port - The Source Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the transmit opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Source Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-188 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 225: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Source Optical Channel - The Source OpticalChannel parameter is used toset the number of the transmitchannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Source OpticalChannel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Sink Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Sink Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the receive OTU boardis located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Sink Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Sink Optical Port - The Sink Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the receive opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Sink Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Sink Optical Channel - The Sink Optical Channelparameter is used to set thenumber of the receivechannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Sink Optical Channel(WDM Cross-Connection)for more information.

Activate Immediately Active, InactiveDefault: Active

Sets whether to immediatelyactivate the cross-connection.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-189

Page 226: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

South Port Slot l Equipment that supportsthe master and slave shelfmanagement: shelf ID(shelf name)-slotnumber-board name

l Equipment that does notsupport the master andslave shelf management:slot number-board name

Displays the slot number ofthe board where thesouthbound port is located.

South Port For example: 3(RX/TX) Displays the number of thesouthbound port.

Table 2-41 Create WXCP Service

Field Value Description

Level For example: GE Displays the rate level of theservice.

Protection Type 1+1 Specifies the level of the newWXCP service.

Direction Unidirectional, BidirectionalDefault: Unidirectional

l When you set Directionto Unidirectional, afteryou create the WXCP,only the selectivereceiving function isimplemented. To ensurethe service availability,you must create tworoutes in the reversedirection on the source.

l When you set Directionto Bidirectional, theU2000 automaticallycreates two routes in thereverse direction.

Source Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Source Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the transmit OTUboard is located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Source Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-190 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Page 227: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Source Optical Port - The Source Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the transmit opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Source Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Source Optical Channel - The Source OpticalChannel parameter is used toset the number of the transmitchannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Source OpticalChannel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)for more information.

Sink Slot Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts. For details, clickthe links in the Descriptioncolumn.

The Sink Slot parameter isused to set the ID of the slotwhere the receive OTU boardis located, which isconfigured with WDM cross-connections.Click Sink Slot (WDMCross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

Sink Optical Port - The Sink Optical Portparameter is used toconfigure the receive opticalinterface for a certainelectrical cross-connectservice (unidirectionalservice flow).Click Sink Optical Port(WDM Cross-ConnectionConfiguration) for moreinformation.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management SystemOperation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management 2 End-to-End WDM Management

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-191

Page 228: Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Managementdocshare04.docshare.tips/files/24594/245944249.pdf · iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01 Operation Guide for

Field Value Description

Sink Optical Channel - The Sink Optical Channelparameter is used to set thenumber of the receivechannel in the port on theOTU board with electricalcross-connections.Click Sink Optical Channel(WDM Cross-Connection)for more information.

Activate Immediately Active, InactiveDefault: Active

Sets whether to immediatelyactivate the cross-connection.

2 End-to-End WDM ManagementiManager U2000 Unified Network Management System

Operation Guide for WDM End-to-End Management

2-192 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)